Elevator Components Best Quality - Made in Germany
EN 81-
20/ -50
-conform
More than you expect ...
✓
LE-Centre
Table of Contents Page Preface and Company Presentation
Drive Units and Frequency Inverter
Inquiry Sheet
16
LEKalk 3.0, the tool for drive design and component selection
17
Homepage LiftEquip, Your information platform
20
LE-Centre
21
Geared Machine, TW- and W-Series
27
Elevator motors
46
Drum drives
52
Emergency Brake System NBS
57
Gearless Machine, PMC- and DAF-Series
59
MO61, Solutions with PMC Gearless
79
Compact Gearless, SC-Series
91
External Rotor Gearless, DAB-Series
97
Drive Accessories, Brake Control, UCM-Modul
101
Frequency Inverter MFC and MFR with regeneration
109
Car Sling FleCS
119
Counterweight GTK, the Variable Solution for many Installation Situations
127
Progressive Safety/Braking System
131
Overspeed Governor and Accessories
135
Oil and Lift Buffers, Telescopic Buffer Uprights
143
Roller Guides and Sliding Guides
151
Rope Pulleys and Accessories
163
Comfort Door S8A/K8A
167
Modernisation for Door Drive F9
187
Kit
LEMoS®, the Modular Modernisation Solution
189
Car Feature
Lighting
217
Safety
Basic Safety Practices for Lifts
220
Calendar
221
The TEAM of LiftEquip
222
Safety- and Elevator Components
Doors
More informatio n to our syste ms in the "The LEA ® Family " - Catalog
LiftEquip reserves the right to alter its products without prior warning. Non-contractual document with no binding effects.
2
4
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
3
Preface
Location and International Alignment Always where you need us
Dear Sir/Madam, As usual, we will be presenting our comprehensive product portfolio in our component catalogue. Our LEA family lift systems are laid out clearly in another catalogue, so that the right information is available to you, depending on your needs. Both catalogues can be downloaded from our homepage www.liftequip.com or obtained from our sales department if you prefer a printed version. Contact data can be found on the last page. Apart from several updates of technical information, the following have been included in the component catalogue for the first time:
• Power ranges and technical data of motors, which we use for our W- and TW series geared machines.
●
Europe
North America
Asia
• Expansion of our modernisation solutions with PMC gearless drives. • Apart from our tried-and-tested MO61S PMC machine frame, our product range now also includes the new MO61E (E for Extended). It increases the rope departure (ASL) to 1206 mm. Both frames feature variable adjustment options for the ASL size and can be easily disassembled, which facilitates installation in cramped machineroom situations.
• The successful TCS car frame was phased out upon the conversion to EN81-20/50 and replaced by the modern
FleCS car frame. The FleCS car frame features great variability, lower weight and clearly defined and described interfaces to the cabin. Deployment of the FleCS car frame in our LEA Comfort lift system is standard.
Africa South America Australia
• Finally, we have expanded the r range of the gearless PMC125 series. The complete PMC125 drive series up to 1000 kg (2:1) is now available with the PMC125L. The PMC125S (450kg) and PMC125M (630kg) were successfully launched some time ago.
We greatly appreciate your interest and now wish you every success in looking for the solution that fits you best. LiftEquip’s team would be pleased to advise you. You can find our contact data on the cover page at the end of the catalogue. What occurs to you when you think of elevators? What do you consider particularly important when you are choosing
We look forward to working with you.
a provider of elevators? No doubt you expect safety and reliability, and want products you can trust. After all, you are Best regards
deciding on an investment that you do not want to regret in future. As LiftEquip, the renowned provider of components for elevators, we know your requirements and expectations very
Your LiftEquip team
precisely. Our products and services, in the same way as our company and actions, have been aligned to these requirements and expectations. You receive full support where you need it. Our international alignment means that we know the national legal and technical requirements in your country. Thousands of highly satisfied customers have been placing their trust in us for many decades. Alongside the „big players“ in the industry, many small and medium-sized elevator companies and service operations are among our customers. What they appreciate is that we know more about elevators than almost anyone else!
4
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
5
Range of Products
High-Quality Components for your Elevator
From the Component to the Complete Systems
Whether you are planning a low-cost standard elevator or a premium installation that will be subjected to high loads, and
Solutions for modernisation
whether your elevator is to run in a closed shaft or as a representative panorama system: we cover the entire range of
We have developed very special solutions for the modernisation of existing elevator systems. Variable in dimensions,
applications from passenger to freight elevators, and deliver all the important components for your elevator.
our compact and highly modern drives can be easily adapted to almost any circumstances. With a modification, you reliably bring your installation up to date with regard to safety, comfort and energy consumption.
Drives With our elevator drives, you can choose between the energy-efficient, gearless drives or the legendary gear drives for virtually any range of speed and rated load. A balanced system with matching frequency control ensures outstanding running performance on every drive.
Gears
Gearless
Inverter
Modernisation
ModKit MO61 S/E ModKit MO61 D4 LEMoS
®
6
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
7
Range of Products
Safety
High-Quality Components for your Elevator
From the Component to the Complete Systems
Kits - The LEA - Family
Doors
®
More informatio n to our syste ms in the "The LEA ® Family " - Catalog
Safety gear frames and safety technology
Overall system in focus
Another centrepiece is the safety gear frame in which your elevator car is mounted to insulate it. Our safety technology
All of our products meet the applicable requirements of European regulations and are certified for many countries. They
components are space-saving and easily accessible, integrated in the safety gear frame. It goes without saying that the
are designed and built according to the state of the art, have long service lives and are very reliable.
comprehensive range of products also includes all other safety devices.
We pay particular attention to the function, co-ordination and availability of the entire elevator on designing our components. This is why you also get components in finely graded construction sizes, each of which has the optimal perfor-
Doors
mance and price for your elevator.
The comfort elevator doors S8A / K8A be in people - employed and freight elevators with high demands on quiet running, lifting height and comfort.
Whether for a new installation or for a modernisation: with our components, you establish the basis for an outstanding
The shaft doors are 81-58 brand tested for fire resistance in accordance with DIN EN. The extensive range of options
elevator and always make a good decision in favour of an economical investment!
(SA - special designs) the door is suitable for use under special requirements.
8
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
9
Consulting for our Customers
The Human Factor for Success
Expertise in Elevators Guarantees you have made the right decision
What makes a company good and how does a good company differ from others? We are convinced that the major factor is the workforce! Their qualifications and ideas have made us one of the best providers on the market. This is to remain so in future. Elevator expertise Our specialists have the elevator expertise that enables them to adapt to your individual ideas and wishes. This is the basis for being able to provide you as a customer with skilled and superior support, above all when older elevator systems or delivery capabilities with respect to spare parts are involved. In the case of an elevator that is to continue running safely after ten, twenty or more years, our expertise is a great advantage. Continuous re-qualification This is why outstanding in-house training and continuous re-qualification are particularly important to us. We want our employees to know our customers and understand their needs and expectations. Our customers place high demands on us with respect to safe and reliable elevators. And they are right to do so – after all, a long-term investment decision is involved!
Every elevator is individual and must be adapted to the type of use in the building and the requirements of the operator. The elevator should fit into the building harmoniously and ensure smooth transport of passengers and freight. This is why the choice of the appropriate components is of particular significance. Here, too, we support you as a partner. Personal consulting In a personal discussion, we are glad to advise you on the telephone or on site, naturally also in your national language. Together we find the optimal solution for your use case. Our aim at all times is to work with you to create an elevator system with optimised technology and economy. Configuration program LEKalk 3.0 Our configuration program LEKalk 3.0 contains all of our experience from theory and practice. The relevant criteria are queried to ensure a reliable selection of products and construction sizes. Alongside the performance data such as rated load and speed, the so-called handling capacity has a decisive influence. The programs deliver you planning data and also the complete documentation that you require for registration and approval of the elevator system. All requirements of the new Lift Directive 2014/33/EU and the EN 81-20/-50 considered.
10
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
11
High-End Technology
High-Quality Components for your Elevator
Production with top technology - at an attractive price for you
Alongside the people and their know-how, the technology in production has a decisive influence on the quality of our products. This is why we invest in the latest processes, machines and systems. Certified quality We guarantee the high quality level with certified processes. Quality assurance checks are performed at each work step.. In our own test laboratory, we use a highly precise 3-D measuring unit. Nothing is left to chance. Our certifications document this impressively: - Quality management ISO 9001 - Environmental management ISO 14001 - Energy Management ISO 50001 - Occupational health and safety management OHSAS 18001. Production at the elevator specialist One important aspect of an elevator is good preparation of the components for installation in the shaft. The metal plate parts must not be sharpedged. This is why we use a laser to cut them without burrs. The exact fitting accuracy of the parts is achieved with a modern bending centre. Excessive tolerances can only be balanced out on the construction site very laboriously. The drive is the component in the elevator that is subjected to the highest stress. A long service life and reliability for gears are only achieved with precise production of the gear teeth. We do this with special machines and by exploiting our extensive experience. The same applies to the motors of the gearless drives. The electrical and thermal configuration and the insulation of the windings are the decisive quality characteristics here. If only metal had no „natural enemies“ such as corrosion ... To counteract this, we use sheets made of stainless steel or with galvanised surfaces. Other surfaces are covered with a high-quality powder coating. Attractive price-performance ratio Alongside quality, you naturally also expect an affordable product. The deployment of technologically and economically optimised processes means that our products are very attractive as regards the price-performance ratio. Our production can react flexibly when individual wishes or very short delivery times have to be complied with. Perfection all the way to delivery Before our components leave our plant, we test the function of all products and the completeness of every delivery. Our customers on the construction site receive correctly adjusted and tested products at all times. This is what we demand of ourselves!
12
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
13
Reliable Delivery
Service and Customer Proximity
Tested products punctually at your elevator system
Full support until you are fully satisfied
For such a sophisticated and long-term investment as an elevator, we offer not only the product itself but also a comprehensive range of services. We assure you: you always get our full support! Consulting and telephone hotline On our telephone hotline, we advise you with regard to our products and the best way to deploy them. You talk to specialists with practical experience who do their best to answer your questions at all times. We clear up most of these questions quickly and reliably by telephone, email or fax. You can also talk to our employees in many languages. Proximity to our customers Close contact to our customers and the practitioners on the construction site provide us with valuable feedback. We use this acquired knowledge to continuously adapt the products and their documentation to the requirements of our customers to an even greater degree. Profit from this wealth of experience from elevator construction and from our close relationship to our customers. On-site support For each product, you receive detailed documentation You order from us and want the products „immediately“?
with all technical details, connection values, installation
We can‘t quite manage „immediately“, but we deliver the components to your construction site within a few days!
instructions and many valuable tips. The safe and errorfree installation of the products is our number one priority.
How do we manage that? The common products such as drives, frequency controls and components for modernisation are in stock in our warehouse. Our production plant is also very well situated for road, rail and air transport. We maintain other warehouses at central locations within Europe. This is an unbeatable advantage when a matter becomes urgent!
Should you ever need on-site support, we will send one of our specialists directly to you and your elevator as quickly as possible. Trade fairs and visiting you
What awaits you at the construction site? We deliver the products safely and suitably packaged for transport to the construction site and prepared for installation in line with the needs of the site. Our own installation specialists check and improve this continuously.
Allow us to convince you of our services: we are represented at many trade fairs within Europe. There, you can inspect our products and have them explained in detail.
We offer solutions
We will also be glad to visit you to present our components
The short-term availability of major components rounds off our service and together we find the right solution for
directly on site.
your project. Safely – quickly – reliably.
Place your trust in the attitude of our employees: „We are only satisfied when your elevator runs perfectly and reliab-
We make every effort to manufacture the best products for you – so they should also arrive at your site in faultless
ly and your wishes have been fulfilled!“
condition and punctually!
14
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
15
Inquiry Sheet
LEKalk 3.0
Inquiry Sheet
LEKalk 3.0
The tool for drive design and component selection
2.1 Drive Units Inquiry/Order
Customer
Inquiry To Order ____________________________ LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Company Contact person Phone
+49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax
+49 (7158) 12-2971
E-Mail
[email protected]
Systems have interfaces to the building and components have interfaces to the neighbouring assemblies.
The LEkalk 3.0 tool is a design and planning instrument for customers and planners with which a gearless or gear drive can be quickly and efficiently calculated with the matching inverter, with or without energy feedback.
Since only you know your project, we need your input in order to be able to submit a tailor-made offer to you, which takes all your requirements into account.
As a result, it is also very easy to calculate different lift configurations – comparing gearless or gear drive or designs with or without energy feedback for lift planning and evaluation and in this way work out the best solution for each application. The drive design, traction capacity and rope detection can be used as calculation, incl. UCM proof, for your registration documents at the body mentioned. The programme is a local application, which you can download from our homepage www.liftequip.de after the corresponding registration. Please contact us in this regard.
Date
Gear
Machine type Controller type
Frequency regulated
2-speed
VVVF inverter
MFC 20/21 MFR
MFC 30/31 Others
Suspension r
1:1
Rated load Q [kg]
3:1
4:1
You can find the enquiry forms for downloading on our home page or contact our sales.
___________
Car weight F [kg] incl. Car sling
You will not only assist us in designing your components, but also benefit from our serving you as quickly as possible.
___________
Counterweight GG [kg] Travel height [m]
___________ ___________
Compensation rope / chain
Yes
Machine located
Above (MR) Below (MR)
Depth of machine [m] (if machine not above)
Below there is a short overview of the LEKalk 3.0 tool options: LEKalk 3.0 suggests possible motors on the basis of the lift data and selection of the gear drive. Here you can for example also indicate whether energy feedback is desired.
No Above beside Below beside
Above (HR) Below (SP)
If it is very urgent, use LEKalk 3.0 and assemble the components needed.
___________ Gear Gearless
Documentation
2:1
___________
Rated speed vN [m/s]
Machine type
We have produced enquiry forms for all of our products, covering the parameters we need for a qualified offer.
Gearless
LEKalk 3.0
Inquiry Sheet
For components
TW 45 C TW 160 PMC 125 PMC 145-2 PMC 170
German
TW 63 B W 263 C DAF 210 DAF 270
English
French*
TW 130 W 332 C SC 300 SC 400 SC 500
Russian**
When you place the order, we will once again check the technology with you so that you can be sure of having selected the best product for your needs.
Notes:
Page 1 of 2
Issue: 12/2016
After selecting the motor and type of frequency control (here with feedback), a selection of possible inverters is suggested. Power consumption and power reserves are likewise stated.
16
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
17
LEKalk 3.0
LEKalk 3.0
LEKalk 3.0
LEKalk 3.0
The tool for drive design and component selection
In this way you can create your own offer independently with price and delivery information at any time.
LEKalk 3.0 shows possible suitable inverters. Power reserves are stated.
LEKalk 3.0
LEKalk 3.0
The tool for drive design and component selection
LEKalk 3.0 calculates the traction capacity on the basis of the relevant parameters.
The design is for submission to the responsible monitoring bodies.
You can add even more components via the catalogue function, such as the base frame, ropes, car frame and the entire spectrum of safety technology.
An employee of LiftEquip would be pleased to assist you with queries and training courses regarding LEkalk 3.0 and with technical advice.
18
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
19
www.liftequip.com
Customer and Training Centre
www.liftequip.com
LE-Centre Customer and Training Centre
LiftEquip Homepage
Your information platform for components and systems
Always online, always up-to-date Here you can find all the information on LiftEquip’s products. Register as a customer and the following additional documents and tools will be available to you: • LEKalk 3.0 • product catalogues • operating manuals • type approval certificates • CAD data In the new LE-centre, we offer the following training courses for you:
• 3D models • ….
LiftEquip newsletter
• LEKalk 3.0 course: Here you learn how to handle LEKalk like a professional. The goal of this course is to learn the finer points of the programme and then use it in everyday work. Course duration: one day
Modernisation lift car LEMoS®
To ensure you are always up-to-date,
LiftEquip has provided a modular solution for lift modernisations for rated loads up to 1050 kg at speeds of 1 m/s in the form of LEMoS®.
please register via the home page for our
Flexible means you can keep the parts of your lift whose replacement is not technically necessary and would make little economic sense. This flexibility with the flexible LEMoS® lift car, which can be combined with the doors of different manufacturers, is this solution’s USP. Customised modernisation solutions, which make allowance for technical as well as economic considerations, can be put together here irrespective of the old lift’s manufacturer.
newsletter.
https://www.liftequip.com/newsletter.html
You can find more advantages of the LEMoS® system below or on our homepage: www.liftequip.com/products/systems/lemos.html
LEMoS® - in a nutshell: • The lift car width and depth can be configured in millimetre steps – hence optimal use of the existing shaft. • Very compact. Micrometer: car width + 40 mm. • Short standstill times thanks to short installation and delivery times. • Prepared for doors of many different well-known markt manufacturers. As a result, it is possible to react with the flexibility required to all kinds of demands. • Modern lift car design and high quality appearance. LEMoS® arose out of modernisation for modernisation! Modernisation can be this easy! Find out from us today with the question sheet.
Machine base frame ModKit MO61 S Extremely flexible and economic! We would like to present another LiftEquip modernisation solution – our new ModKit MO61S machine base frame. It is a pre-installed machine base frame, specially developed for our gearless PMC145-2 M/XL and L/XL for 1:1 suspension, rated load up to 675 kg and 1.0 m/s. The ASL dimension (distance of lift car suspension to the counterweight suspension) can be set flexibly from 555 to 765 mm and is delivered with rope guard. A hand release and hand wheel are optionally available. The frame is pre-installed and can be supplied from stock with the drive.
• MFC/MFR inverter course: In the theoretical part you learn the basics of inverter technology and the correct installation and fast start-up of the MFC and MFR inverters. In the practical section you work on our training lift (1000 kg, 17m, 1.6 m/s) to implement what you have learned with exercises and get practical tips and tricks. You must bring your own work clothing and personal protective equipment. Course duration: one-and-a-half days *For assistance during commissioning, you can contact our hotline (+49172735 2020).
• Home lifts Gulliver and Orion course: Learn the installation and start-up of the home lift on our Gulliver training model. You must bring your work clothing and safety shoes. Course duration: one day • Maintenance and service on LiftEquip motors: You learn the basics of gear drive and gearless drive technology as well as everything needed to maintain and correctly set the drives of LiftEquip and replacing the rotary encoder and traction sheave. You must bring your work clothing and safety shoes. Course duration: one day • LEA assembly course: You learn how to assemble the LiftEquip LEA MRL building kit in real lift shafts. We show you the version of frameless assembly. The focus here in particular is on the installation of the machine base frame. You must bring your own work clothing and personal protective equipment. Course duration: one day Please contact us if you are interested in one of the courses.
www.liftequip.com/products/systems/modkit-mo61s.html
20
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
21
Technical Report
Own Notes
Technical Report
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
LiftEquip – from components to home lifts
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
a matching rope drum for two ropes for the familiar TW63, TW130 and TW160 gear systems. These can be used to move rated loads of 450 to 1200 kg and, in accordance with EN 81-1, speeds of up to 0.63 m/s can be achieved. This is a clever alternative if other drive system can only be installed with high overhead or, in accordance with EN 81-70, a larger elevator car has to be installed.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
The legendary gear systems
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Clearly structured trade fair booth: gear systems and door (front), gearless and frequency converters (back), system parts (left) and home lift (right)
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
LiftEquip is consistently pointing the way as component supplier and solution provider.
Uniform colour assignment for all drives
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Trade fair visitors to Hall 1 found the well-known exhibitors in their usual places. In line with tradition, LiftEquip Elevator Components from Neuhausen near Stuttgart could be found on the right-hand side with a clearly structured booth layout. It was conspicuous and well received that all gear and gearless drives are now painted with an environmentally friendly and rugged water-based paint in a noble blackgrey. This has provided the high-quality drive components from LiftEquip with a uniform colour assignment, from the reliable drives all the way to the progressive frequency converters.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
22
LiftEquip was present for the 11th time at the largest elevator trade fair interlift 2013 in Augsburg. Once again this year, interesting innovations awaited the visitors: the drum drive for elevators without counterweight; the gearless for "adjacent" with traction sheave in the shaft; the wide range of balanced components conforming with EN 81-1/2:A3; the home lift for retrofitting inside and outside of buildings.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Issue 09/2017
UK
78
www.liftequip.com
The drum drive is back Even today, drum drive elevators are still in operation in numerous buildings. For these elevators and for older installations with small car floor areas, the drum drive using modern technology is a good modernisation solution. The fact that there is no counterweight enables better use of the shaft cross section and a larger elevator car can be installed. Even hydraulic systems can easily be converted to a frequencycontrolled drum drive. LiftEquip offers
From the small TW45 all the way to the mighty W332, LiftEquip offers a very wide range of gear systems, unsurpassed by any other provider. "Above all during modernisation, the optional horizontal or vertical design of smaller gear systems means they can be adapted to almost any spatial circumstances," says sales expert Thomas Bäzner. At LiftEquip, the continuous enhancement of the gear systems means that they are a genuine alternative to modern gearless drives from a technical and economic perspective. Their high efficiency enables energyefficient operation. The gear systems of the TW model series are optionally available with an emergency brake system conforming with EN 81-1:A3. The large gear systems of the W model series move high rated loads of up to 6 metric tonnes.
Technical Report - From components to home lifts
LiftEquip - From components to home lifts
The modern gear systems with high efficiency are still very much in demand, above all for modernisation
LIFT-REPORT
39. Jahrg. (2013)
Heft 6
23
Technical Report
Technical Report
Technical Report
Technical Report
The gearless range encounters substantial interest: filigree model series PMC145 (front) and strong Compact Gearless (left)
Gearless drives remain first choice Arranged in a circle were the impressively filigree gearless drives of the PMC145 model series in the construction sizes from "S" (rated load 275 kg / suspension 1:1) to "XL" (1000 kg / 2:1). On request, these and the larger PMC170 are available together with the modernisation solution ModKit MO61. This enables very simple conversion of existing elevators with gear systems to a gearless drive. The options range from suspension 1:1 up to 1000 kg / 1.0 m/s and/or in 2:1 up to 1000 kg / 1.6 m/s. Under the key words "Geared to Gearless", another modernisation solution with DAF210 and/or DAF270 was presented as a new product. The system is suitable for upward or downward rope departure and for the traction sheave in the shaft or in the machine room. In all cases, secure support in relation to the building, protected from vibration, is ensured. The highlight: existing circumstances such as wall openings, rope pulleys, safety gear frame and counterweight do not have to be changed. As could be expected, many expert visitors were very interested. Upwards, the range of products is rounded off by the Compact Gearless SC300/400 using synchronous technology.
Frequency converters from 5 to more than 50 kW LiftEquip offers a wide range of frequency converters for motor outputs of 5 to 50 kW or more, for asynchronous or synchronous drives. They are characterised by simple parameter input, quick initial operation and safe evacuation and maintenance. The modern
80
24
generations of converters in black housings are configured to conform with EN 81-1:A3 and do not require contactors, which makes them very quiet. In addition to many options, they include an integrated brake control, power filter, interface cards, as well as a display. Connection per plug&play makes commissioning very simple. The MFC model series has been extended to include the construction sizes 100R, 155R and 310R with nominal output power of up to 140 kVA. The devices of the MFR model series for synchronous drives have an integrated energy recovery unit and are available in the performance classes from 5.5 to 18.5 kW.
Solutions for all drive types with A3 conformity Under the key safety concept UCM (Unintended Car Movement), LiftEquip provides solutions in accordance with EN 81-1/2:A3 for all kinds of drives ranging from the hydraulic installation to the geared drive to the gearless elevator. A brochure provides a clearly arranged overview of which certified components can be used for each drive system. This can be seen at www. EN81-A3.com.
LiftEquip - From components to home lifts
High-quality S8A comfort door with glass door panels and sturdy TW160 gear with emergency braking device
range is the Gulliver home lift: a freestanding elevator with its own shaft and a travel height of up to 15 metres with a maximum of 5 landings. The system is configured in accordance with EN 81-41 and Machines Directive 2006/42/EC. The hydraulic drive enables a rated load of 300 or 400 kg with a speed of 0.15 m/s. Only 10 cm is required as the floor recess; alternatively, an access ramp can be installed. The shaft head height is only 2350 mm. The doors can be arranged on three sides. "Gulliver is suitable for setting up indoors and outdoors," explains
Norbert Blum. "This makes Gulliver an ideal retrofit solution in the private and public sector. This is confirmed by many trade fair visitors. We are very excited about the way the market will develop."
Skills in development, production and system application What are the special features of LiftEquip and the offered products? Managing Director Andreas Hönnige provides some insight: "The products of LiftEquip have been developed in-
house and are made in Germany. They are configured with the extensive experience of a system provider and optimised in relation to one another. Our customers appreciate the ability of our salespeople to provide useful information alongside their commitment, also where special wishes may be involved. To ensure long-term customer loyalty, we attach high value to skilled consulting, and reliable service, all the way to rapid spare parts supply." On request, interested customers are very welcome to tour one of the largest production locations for elevators in Europe.
nents was exhibited on a large shelf within the main trade fair booth: safety gears, overspeed governors, buffers, guides and elevator car LED lighting system. Markus Bruckmeyer, Sales Manager for Germany: "These important components and many other small parts concerning every aspect of elevators can also be ordered directly from LiftEquip. Our customers appreciate this, as it rounds off our range of products perfectly."
Technical Report - From components to home lifts
Technical Report - From components to home lifts
LiftEquip - From components to home lifts
New: Gulliver home lift To date, LiftEquip has aligned its offering to components and drive products for traction elevators. Brand new in the
The S8A / K8A comfort door for sophisticated applications On the other side of the trade fair booth, LiftEquip exhibited the S8A landing door for the matching K8A car door. Günter Stoll, Sales Manager for Export North / East: "This door series has been developed for deployment in high-quality elevator systems. The design is very solid and the frequencycontrolled door drive is very quiet. The incredibly wide range of version options enables adaptation of the door to virtually any customer requirement. This door series clearly stands out from the broad mass of standard doors." It was only possible to exhibit a few variants on the trade fair booth. The entire performance capability of the comfort door is shown in the new door brochure.
System components and small parts It was presented on a separate trade fair booth two years ago, but this year a small selection of system compo-
New product: Gulliver home lift in a free-standing shaft, ideal for retrofitting and setup indoors or outdoors. Picture: LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
LIFT-REPORT
39. Jahrg. (2013)
Heft 6
Issue 09/2017
82
www.liftequip.com
LIFT-REPORT
39. Jahrg. (2013)
Heft 6
25
Gears
TW- and W-Series Gears
Own Notes ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Product description
28
Duty range, Performance Matrix Gears
30
TW45C
34
TW63B
36
TW130
38
TW160
40
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
W263C
42
W332C
44
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Elevator motors
46
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Drum drives
52
Emergency Brake System NBS
57
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Colouring for all Drives
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
100
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
26
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
27
Gears
Gears
20/ -50
Product Description Gears
TW- and W-Series
EN 81-
Product Description
-conform
All gear drives are designed with
Machine base frame
VVVF motors in B5 configuration
A series of base frames are available
with flexible coupling and as result
in connection with the gear drives,
provide maximum travel comfort. De-
e.g. with and without diverting pulleys,
pending on your space requirements,
for 2:1 or 1:1 rope suspensions, in
these gear drives are available with
left or right designs and in general for
a vertically or horizontally installed
downward traction sheaves. The rope
motor (TW160, W263C und W332C
distance dimension can be chosen
only horizontal).
flexibly according to the circumstan-
Pole-changing (AC2) motors are also
ces on the spot as a result of suitable
Emergency brake system NBS
optionally available for the geared
perforation patterns for the attachment
optional
machine TW63B.
of the drive and diverting pulley. The
TW45C to TW160:
One- to three-stage worm gears
base frame design left / right can be
The certified brake fulfills the require-
ensure continuous smooth running.
chosen irrespective of the left / right
ment as braking device against over-
Tight production tolerances and the
traction sheave.
speed according to EN 81-20 /5.6.6
use of high quality materials preserve
The machines base frames are moun-
and against unintentional movement
smooth running. Synthetic transmis-
ted on anti-vibration elements.
of the car according EN 81-20 /5.6.7.
sion oil ensures optimal lubrication and high efficiency.
Optimal adjustment to your lift
The hardened, low-wear traction
Traction sheaves in all directions are
EN81 20/-50
sheave has a long service life.
possible, but must be ordered as
Our drives meet all requirements
custom-build.
with regard to the above standards,
TW45C up to 1000 kg*
TW63B up to 2000 kg*
• Horizontal/vertical version • Right or left hand • Emergency braking system optional
• • • •
TW160 up to 4000 kg*
W263C up to 5000 kg*
Horizontal/vertical version Right or left hand Emergency braking system optional pole changing
TW130 up to 3500 kg*
• • • •
Gears
TW- and W-Series
Horizontal/vertical version Right or left hand Emergency braking system optional pole changing
W332C up to 6000 kg*
in particular the approval of safety
The service brake keeps the lift safe as dual-circuit disc brake in the
Also optionally as Ex part
TW45C and from the TW63B as
An extended traction sheave shaft
dual-circuit external contracting shoe
with wall bearing, vapour-proof shaft
brake, even if a pitch circle fails.
duct and the optional accompanying
brakes and the rope guard.
• Horizontal version • Right or left hand • Emergency braking system optional
base frame permit the use of standard machines for Ex areas.
• Horizontal version • Right or left hand • Worm gear with combined plained bearings
• Horizontal version • Right or left hand • Worm gear with combined plained bearings
*Representation of the drives: horizontal right, 2:1 suspension
28
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
29
Gears
Gears
TW- and W-Series
TW- and W-Series
Duty range for rope suspension 2:1
3800
8000
3600
7500
3400
7000
3200
6500
3000
6000
Gears
Gears
Duty range for rope suspension 1:1
W332C 2800
W332C
5500
2600
rated load (kg)
5000 W332C
rated load (kg)
2400 2200 2000
4500 4000
TW160 W332C
3500 TW160
1800
3000
1600
2500
TW130
1400
TW130
TW160
2000 TW63B
1200
1500
1000
TW130
TW160
1000 TW63B
TW130
TW63B
TW45C
800
500
600
0,5
TW63B
0,8
1,0
1,3
1,5
1,8
2,0
2,3
2,5
rated speed (m/s)
TW45C
Data can vary depending on car weight and travel height
400
0,5
0,8
1,0
1,3
1,5
1,8
2,0
2,3
2,5
rated speed (m/s)
Data can vary depending on car weight and travel height
30
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
31
Gears
Gears
TW- and W-Series
TW- and W-Series
Performance Matrix Gears 2:1 40 m
Travel height 25 m
Travel height 25 m
Operating speed 0,63 m/s
0,8 m/s
1 m/s
1,2 m/s
1,6 m/s
2 m/s
Operating speed 0,63 m/s
0,8 m/s
1 m/s
1,2 m/s
1,6 m/s
Q= 450kg F= 950kg
TW45C, 46:1, TS440 2726 kJ/h, 3,8 kW 6,5 A / 10,1 A 1258 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW45C,46:1,TS520 3366 kJ/h, 3,8 kW 8,3 A / 12,3 A 1352 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
*TW45C,32:1,TS440 3630 kJ/h, 3.8 kW 8,9 A / 13,9 A 1389 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW45C,32:1,TS590 4872 kJ/h, 5,2 kW 12,9 A / 21,5 A 1243 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW45C, 41:2, TS440 5513 kJ/h, 7 kW 13,8A / 21,5 A 1424 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW63B, 48:2, TS 675 7091 kJ/h, 10 kW 22,1 A / 38,8 A 1358 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
Q= 630kg F= 1000kg
TW45C, 41:2, TS 440 3234 kJ/h, 3,8 kW 7,9 A / 12,3 A 1121 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW45C, 41:2, TS 440 3969 kJ/h, 5,2 kW 11 A / 14,5 A 1424 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW45C, 41:2, TS 590 5039 kJ/h, 7 kW 12,4 A / 17,8 A 1327 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW45C, 40:3, TS440 5555 kJ/h, 7 kW 13,8 A / 19,7 A 1389 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW63B, 43:3, TS 675 8150 kJ/h, 10 kW 25,1 A / 40,4 A 1298 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
Q= 630kg F= 1000kg
TW45C, 32:1,TS360 3595 kJ/h, 3,6 kW 8,6 A / 13,3 A 1070 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW45C, 32:1,TS440 4593 kJ/h, 4,6 kW 12,8 A / 19 A 1111 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW45C, 32:1,TS440 5310 kJ/h, 7,0 kW 12,9 A / 17,9 A 1389 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW45C, 41:2, TS360 5686 kJ/h, 7,0 kW 13,7 A / 20 A 1305 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW63B, 48:2, TS 590 7779 kJ/h, 9,9 kW 23,5 A / 40,2 A 1243 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW63B, 48:2, TS 675 9499 kJ/h, 13,0 kW 25,7 A / 40,8 A 1358 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
Q= 1000kg F= 1500kg
TW45C, 32:1, TS 520 5388 kJ/h, 7 kW 13,4 A / 16,1 A 1481 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW45C, 40:3, TS 360 5956 kJ/h, 6,3 kW 15,8 A / 22,2 A 1132 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
*TW45C, 40:3,TS 360 6597 kJ/h, 7 kW 15,9 A / 21,9 A 1415 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW63B, 43:3, TS 510 9060 kJ/h, 10 kW 27,7 A / 43,4 A 1288 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
*TW63B, 43:3, TS 675 11370 kJ/h, 13 kW 30,2 A / 47,9 A 1298 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
Q= 800kg F=1050kg
TW45C,32:1,TS320 4407 kJ/h, 5,0 kW 11,7 A / 17,2 A 1203 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW45C,32:1,TS320 5176 kJ/h, 7,0 kW 12,8 A / 15,2 A 1528 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
*TW63B, 33:1, TS 510 *TW63B, 33:1, TS 510 TW63B, 48:2, TS 510 6305 kJ/h, 6,9 kW 6692 kJ/h, 10 kW 8914 kJ/h, 10 kW 14,6 A / 22,5 A 20,5 A / 29,5 A 27,2 A / 39 A 1236 1/min, (NBS) 1483 1/min, (NBS) 1438 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1 MFC 20-32 V1 MFC 20-32 V1
TW63B, 43:3, TS 450 11005 kJ/h, 12,7 kW 29,3 A / 46,5 A 1217 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
Q= 1600kg F= 1800kg
TW63B, 33:1, TS 590 7744 kJ/h, 10 kW 23,7 A / 31,8 A 1346 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW63B, 48:2, TS 590 9716 kJ/h, 12,9 kW 25,6 A / 37,4 A 1243 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW63B, 43:3, TS 450 11577 kJ/h, 12,7 kW 31,1 A / 45,1 A 1217 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 43:3, TS 540 14134 kJ/h, 15,6 kW 35,9 A / 53,4 A 1217 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW130, 43:3, TS 640 17993 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 46,8 A / 65,6 A 1369 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
Q= 1000kg F= 1200kg
TW63B, 48:1, TS 450 5277 kJ/h, 7 kW 12,5 A / 18 A 1283 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1
TW63B, 33:1, TS 450 6370 kJ/h, 9 kW 20,4 A / 30,5 A 1121 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW63B, 33:1, TS 450 7422 kJ/h, 10 kW 22,9 A / 32,3 A 1401 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW63B, 48:2, TS 450 8939 kJ/h, 9,8 kW 27 A /42,4 A 1222 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 45:2,TS 540 12198 kJ/h, 16 kW 30,8 A / 46,8 A 1273 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 45:2, TS 640 15039 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 38,2 A / 57 A 1343 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
Q= 2000kg F= 2200kg
TW63B, 48:2, TS 450 9333 kJ/h, 10 kW 28 A / 38,1 A 1283 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 45:2, TS540 11736 kJ/h, 16 kW 29,3 A / 42,1 A 1273 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
*TW130, 45:2, TS640 13668 kJ/h, 16 kW 34 A / 48,1 A 1343 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW130, 43:3, TS 540 17425 kJ/h, 20 kW 43,9 A / 65,2 A 1217 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW 1301, 43:3, TS 640 21916 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 56,8 A / 77,8 A 1369 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
Q= 1200kg F= 1400kg
*TW130, 52:1, TS 540 TW130, 52:1, TS 640 7099 kJ/h, 10,4 kW 9179 kJ/h, 11,1 kW 17 A / 26,6 A 21,7 A / 33 A 1159 1/min, (NBS) 1241 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-15 V1 MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 42:1, TS 640 10762 kJ/h, 11,2 kW 25,5 A / 38,5 A 1253 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 35:1, TS 640 11494 kJ/h, 16,0 kW 28,6 A / 43,9 A 1253 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 45:2, TS 540 14917 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 37,4 A / 56,4 A 1273 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW130, 45:2, TS 640 18395 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 46,8 A / 67,6 A 1343 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
Q= 2500kg F= 2500kg
TW130, 35:1, TS 640 12048 kJ/h, 16 kW 30,2 A / 40,8 A 1316 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 45:2, TS 540 14447 kJ/h, 16 kW 36 A / 49,4 A 1273 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW130, 45:2, TS 640 17805 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 44,6 A / 60,4 A 1343 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
*TW1301, 43:3, TS 540 TW 1301, 43:3, TS 540 18859 kJ/h, 26,8 kW 25128 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 47,2 A / 71,3 A 67 A / 80,3 A 1217 1/min, (NBS) 1622 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 1600kg F= 1800kg
TW130, 52:1, TS 540 9737 kJ/h, 10,4 kW 23,9 A / 34,2 A 1159 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 42:1, TS 540 10563 kJ/h, 15,2 kW 26,8 A / 39,2 A 1188 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 35:1, TS 540 12597 kJ/h, 15,8 kW 31,3 A / 46,1 A 1238 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 35:1, TS 540 14244 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 36,9 A / 49,9 A 1485 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW130, 45:2, TS 540 18007 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 45,8 A / 68,2 A 1273 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW160, 45:2,TS 640 22441 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 57,3 A / 81,8 A 1343 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
Q= 3000kg F= 2800kg
TW130, 35:1, TS 640 14468 kJ/h, 16 kW 36,2 A / 47 A 1316 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW130, 45:2, TS 540 17357 kJ/h, 20,5kW 42,8 A / 58,5 A 1273 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW130, 45:2, TS 540 19078 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 50,9 A / 61,1 A 1592 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
TW1301, 43:3, TS 540 23444 kJ/h, 32,6 kW 59,5 A / 86,1 A 1217 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
TW160, 41:3, TS 640 31911 kJ/h, 42 kW 79,4 A / 129 A 1305 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 1800kg F= 2000kg
TW130, 52:1, TS 540 10891 kJ/h, 10,4 kW 26,6 A / 37,4 A 1159 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 42:1, TS 540 11791 kJ/h, 15,2 kW 29,9 A / 43 A 1188 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 35:1, TS 540 14086 kJ/h, 15,8 kW 35 A / 50,7 A 1238 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW1301, 45:2, TS 540 TW160, 51:2, TS 640 17041 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 20881 kJ/h, 26,8 kW 38,3 A / 53,3 A 52,9 A / 78,8 A 955 1/min, (NBS) 1218 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1 MFC 20-60 V1
*TW160, 45:2, TS 640 23805 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 59,8 A / 87,9 A 1343 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
Q= 3500kg F= 3200kg
TW130, 45:2, TS 540 16973 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 38,6 A / 46,4 A 1003 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW160, 57:2, TS 640 19171 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 48,2 A / 63,6 A 1361 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW160, 45:2, TS 640 23354 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 58,8 A / 77,4 A 1343 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
TW160, 45:2, TS 640 26088 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 68,6 A / 81,8 A 1611 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-105 V1
*W 332C, 57:3, TS 800 36107 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 97,9 A / 179,1 A 1452 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 2000kg F= 2200kg
TW130, 42:1, TS 540 11336 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 24,3 A / 33,6 A 936 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW130, 35:1, TS 540 13544 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 30 A / 39,7 A 990 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW160, 41:1, TS 640 16063 kJ/h, 20,1 kW 39,1 A / 57,6 A 1225 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW160, 35:1, TS 640 18412 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 44,7 A / 66,8 A 1253 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW160, 51:2, TS640 23266 kJ/h, 26,8 kW 59 A / 87 A 1217 1/min, (NBS) MFC20-60 V1
W263C, 41:2, TS 640 31384 kJ/h, 36,2 kW 73,7 A / 113,2 A 1224 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 4000kg F= 3500kg
TW160, 35:1, TS 640 18719 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 45,8 A / 59,2 A 1316 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW160, 51:2, TS 640 22169 kJ/h, 26,8 kW 55,4 A / 75 A 1218 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
TW160, 45:2, TS 640 25900 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 64,7 A / 85,7 A 1343 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-105 V1
W263C, 41:2, TS 640 34038 kJ/h, 42 kW 86,6 A / 131,6 A 1468 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 2200kg F= 2400kg
TW160, 50:1, TS640 12777 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 26,9 A / 36,6 A 940 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW160, 50:1, TS 640 14737 kJ/h, 15,3 kW 36,4 A / 51,1 A 1194 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW160, 41:1, TS 640 17637 kJ/h, 20,1 kW 42,9 A / 62,4 A 1224 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW160, 35:1, TS 640 18903 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 46,7 A / 70 A 1253 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
W263C, 41:2, TS 540 27506 kJ/h, 31,1 kW 70,3 A / 107,1 A 1160 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
W263C, 41:2, TS 540 31658 kJ/h, 42,0 kW 80,6 A / 130,9 A 1450 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 4500kg F= 4000kg
TW160, 35:1, TS 640 19722 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 49,2 A / 64,3 A 1316 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
W263C, 50:2, TS 540 25747 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 64,8 A / 87,9 A 1415 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
W263C, 41:2, TS 540 31046 kJ/h, 42 kW 78 A / 120 A 1450 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
*W 332C,57:3,TS640 36192 kJ/h, 42 kW 86,3 A / 172,4 A 1361 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 2400kg F= 2600kg
TW160, 50:1, TS 640 13885 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 29,2 A / 39,2 A 940 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-32 V1
TW160, 41:1, TS 640 16645 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 36,1 A / 46,9 A 979 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-48 V1
TW160, 35:1, TS 640 18262 kJ/h, 23,0 kW 50,5 A / 71,2 A 1045 1/min, (NBS) MFC 20-60 V1
W263C, 40:1, TS640 22661 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 57,3 A / 82 A 1432 1/min MFC 20-60 V1
W263C,41:2,TS540 29694 kJ/h, 34,3 kW 71,3 A / 107,9 A 1160 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
W332C, 46:2,TS700 36143 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 93,6 A / 176,7 A 1255 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 5000kg F= 4500kg
W263C, 50:2, TS 540 24781 kJ/h, 29,9 kW 63,4 A / 88,6 A 1114 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
W263C 41:2, TS 540 30548 kJ/h, 34,3 kW 72,9 A / 101,1 A 1160 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
W332C, 46:2,TS640 35725 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 95,8 A / 177,5 A 1373 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 2600kg F= 2800kg
W332C, 63:1,TS640 16046 kJ/h, 26,1 kW 38,3 A / 87,4 A 1184 1/min MFC 20-60 V1
W263C, 40:1, TS 540 18431 kJ/h, 24,9 kW 46,5 A / 70,5 A 1132 1/min MFC 20-48 V1
W263C, 40:1, TS 540 20833 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 52,6 A / 75,4 A 1415 1/min MFC 20-60 V1
W332C, 47:1, TS 800 26872 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 65,1 A / 121 A 1347 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
W332C, 59:2, TS 700 34660 kJ/h, 42 kW 82 A / 166,7 A 1288 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
*W332C, 46:2,TS640 36445 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 95,3 A / 173,6 A 1373 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 5500kg F= 5000kg
W332C, 47:1, TS 800 28731 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 70,8 A / 123,9 A 1414 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
W332C, 59:2, TS 640 34694 kJ/h, 42 kW 85 A / 163,1 A 1409 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
*W332C, 46:2,TS640 37993 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 98,7 A / 176,3 A 1373 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
*W332C, 63:1,TS640 16622 kJ/h, 26,1 kW 37,9 A / 87,9 A 1184 1/min MFC 20-60 V1
W332C, 63:1,TS700 19808 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 47,9 A / 101,2 A 1375 1/min MFC 20-60 V1
W332C, 47:1,TS640 23550 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 58,1 A / 101,9 A 1403 1/min MFC 20-60 V1
W332C, 47:1,TS800 28833 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 69,7 A / 126,6 A 1347 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
W332C, 59:2, TS 700 37186 kJ/h, 42 kW 87,8 A / 175,8 A 1288 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
W332C, 46:2, TS 640 38059 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 97,2 A / 178,3 A 1373 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 6000kg F= 5500kg
W332C, 47:1, TS800 31916 kJ/h, 37 kW 74,6 A / 124,8 A 1414 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
W332C, 59:2, TS640 36111 kJ/h, 45,4 kW 97 A / 175,3 A 1409 1/min MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 2800kg F= 3000kg
The calculations are examples, alterations are possible
* 50% compensation of rated load Machine type, Ratio, TS-Ø [mm] Heat dissipated [kJ/h], Motor perf. [kW] at RPM Req. motor current [A] / Req. start up current [A] Motor RPM [1/min], (NBS possible) Inverter type.
Q = Rated load, F = Maximum mass of car, TS = Traction sheave diameter, (NBS) = Compatible with emergency brake system.
* 50% compensation of rated load Machine type, Ratio, TS-Ø [mm] Heat dissipated [kJ/h], Motor perf. [kW] at RPM Req. motor current [A] / Req. start up current [A] Motor RPM [1/min], (NBS possible) Inverter type. Q = Rated load, F = Maximum mass of car, TS = Traction sheave diameter, (NBS) = Compatible with emergency brake system. 1) stronger brake
The calculations are examples, alterations are possible
1) stronger brake
Stand 04/2015
32
40 m
Gears
Gears
Performance Matrix Gears 1:1
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
33
TW-Drives
TW-Drives
TW45C
TW45C
EN 81-
20/ -50
Gears
The ideal solution for light loads • VVVF-motor (5,2 and 7 kW) controlled accurately • Emergency braking system NBS, optional • Brake monitoring switch, manual brake release • Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 320, 360, 440, 520 or 590 mm • Gear, motor, traction sheave: approx. 250 kg Special designs are possible
Gears
-conform
PERFORMANCE DATA Rated Load Q [kg]
Operational Speed v [m/s]
Suspension r
320
0,63 - 1,20
1:1
450
0,5 - 1,25
1:1
630
0,5 - 1,0
1:1
900
0,4 - 0,63
2:1
1000
0,4 - 1,0
2:1
1300
0,4
2:1
TW45C horizontal right
TW45C on machine base frame
Motor position horizontal (pictured with traction sheave on left and with emergency brake system NBS, optional)
Brake release lever (plug-in type
Technical Data Gear type
TW45C
Axle distance
mm
120
Load on shaft (Ft)
kN
≤ 30 46:1 / 32:1 / 41:2 / 40:3
Ratios Oil filling
L
5,5
Type of oil Backlash Weight
synthetic gear oil °
0,03 - 0,07
kg
ca. 105
Type of protection - Motor Hand wheel
Bolt connection 4xM16
mm
Motor position vertical (pictured with traction sheave on left)
IP54 D270 (plastic)
Actual Value Sensor (standard)
WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL WDG100-38-1024 HTL WDG100-38-1024 Sinus/Cosinus
Actual Value Sensor (special) Operational Brake Type
Robastop RSZ 60
Braking Torque
Nm
2 x 50
Operational Voltage
VDC
180 - overexitation // 90 - retentive voltage
Traction Sheave Diameter Traction Sheave
mm
320
360
Rim width
mm
102
77
max. Numerbrs of grooves (z x d) Weight
kg
440
520
590
115
7x8
5x8
7 x 8 / 6 x 10 6 x 11
30
25
45
7 x 8 / 6 x 10 6 x 11 / 5 x 12 55
60
DT = 320 W T = 102
360 77
* Dimensions applicable to D T = 360 mm
Issue 09/2017
520 115
590 115
Bolt connection 4xM16 Brake release lever (plug-in type)
Subject to modifications
34
440 115
www.liftequip.com
35
TW-Drives
TW-Drives
TW63B
TW63B
EN 81-
20/ -50
Gears
The machine for middle loads • VVVF-motor (5,2 up to 13 kW) controlled accurately • Emergency braking system NBS, optional • Brake monitoring switch, manual brake release • Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction sheave shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9) • Gear according to ATEX • Brake magnets, Ex-proof (SA 15) • Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 450, 510, 520, 590 or 675 mm • Gear, motor, traction sheave: approx. 350 kg Special designs are possible
TW63B horizontal right
Gears
-conform
PERFORMANCE DATA Rated Load Q [kg]
Operational Speed v [m/s]
Suspension r
800
0,63 - 2,0
1:1
1000
0,63 - 1,2
1:1
1000
0,4 - 1,6
2:1
1600
0,4 - 1,2
2:1
2000
0,4 - 0,63
2:1
TW63B, vertical left hand on machine base frame down beside
Technical Data Gear type
TW63B
Axle distance
mm
155
Load on shaft (Ft)
kN
≤ 43 (rope departure direction downwards) 54:1 / 48:1 / 33:1 / 48:2 / 43:3
Ratios Oil filling
vertical: ca.11 / horizontal: ca. 9
L
Type of oil Backlash Weight
synthetic gear oil °
0,025 - 0,07
kg
ca. 190
Motor
pole changing
frequency-controlled
Type of protection - Motor
IP54
Hand wheel
flywheel rim
D270 (plastic) WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL
Actual Value Sensor (standard)
WDG100-38-1024 HTL WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos
without
Actual Value Sensor (special) Operational Brake Type
TW63B
Braking Torque
Nm
max. 2 x 90
Operational Voltage
VDC
180 - overexitation // 90 - retentive voltage
Traction Sheave Diameter Traction Sheave
mm
450
510
520
590
675
Rim width
mm
132
132
110
132
96
8x8 7 x 10/11
8x8 7 x 10/11 6 x 12
5 x 13
8x8 7 x 10/11 6 x 12
6x8 5 x 10/11 4 x 12
50
60
50
max. Numerbrs of grooves (z x d) Weight
kg
1 Machine centre of gravity 2 Mount of machine on machine base frame 3 Operation lever for manual brake release (plug-in)
kproj. = see product catalog
70
Subject to modifications
36
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
37
TW-Drives
TW-Drives
TW130
TW130
EN 81-
20/ -50
Gears
The ideal solution for higher loads • VVVF-motor (11 up to 42 kW) controlled accurately • Emergency braking system NBS, optional • Brake monitoring switch, manual brake release • Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction sheave shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9) • Part-Ex proof: wall bearing with vapour-proof shaft duct, extended drive shaft and suitable machine base frame (SA4) • Reinforced machine mounting for rope pull resultant - horizontal or vertical pointing upwards (SA1) • Additional terminal block for intermediate terminal connection (SA12) • Gear according to ATEX • Brake magnets, Ex-proof (SA 15) • Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 540, 640, 720 or 900 mm • Gear, motor, traction sheave: approx. 560 kg Special designs are possible
TW130 horizontal right
Gears
-conform
PERFORMANCE DATA Rated Load Q [kg]
Operational Speed v [m/s]
Suspension r
1000
0,63 - 2,5
1:1
1300
0,63 - 2,5
1:1
1600
0,63 - 1,0
1:1
1300
0,5 - 2,0
2:1
2200
0,5 - 1,75
2:1
3000
0,5 - 0,8
2:1
TW130 on machine base frame
Technical Data Gear type
TW130
Axle distance
mm
191
Load on shaft (Ft)
kN
≤ 77 (rope departure direction downwards) 52:1 / 42:1 / 35:1 / 45:2 / 43:3
Ratios Oil filling
vertical: ca. 25 / horizontal: ca. 20
L
Type of oil Backlash Weight
synthetic gear oil °
0,02 - 0,06
kg
430
Motor Motor
frequency-controlled
Type of protection - Motor
IP 21
Hand wheel
IP 55
D270 / 360 (plastic)
Actual Value Sensor (standard)
D270 / 360 (plastic) WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL WDG100-38-1024 HTL WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos
Actual Value Sensor (special) Operational brake Type
TW130
Braking Torque
Nm
Operational Voltage
VDC
max. 2 x 125 / max. 2 x 200
max. 2 x 125
180 - overexitation // 90 - retentive voltage
Traction Sheave Diameter Traction Sheave
mm
Rim width
mm
540
kg
720
900
5 x 16 7 x 12/13, 8 x 10/11, 10 x 8, 9 x 9
6 x 12/13, 7 x 10/11
90
150
150
max. Numerbrs of grooves (z x d) Weight
640
75
140
kproj. = see product catalog
Subject to modifications
38
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
39
TW-Drives
TW-Drives
TW160
TW160
EN 81-
20/ -50
Gears
The cart horse for higher loads • VVF-motor (11 up to 42 kW) controlled accurately • Emergency braking system NBS, optional • Brake monitoring switch, manual brake release • Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction sheave shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9) • Part-Ex proof: wall bearing with vapour-proof shaft duct, extended drive shaft and suitable machine base frame (SA4) • Gear according to ATEX • Brake magnets, Ex-proof (SA 15) • Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 640, 720 or 800 mm • Gear, motor, traction sheave: approx. 925 kg Special designs are possible
TW160 horizontal right
Gears
-conform
PERFORMANCE DATA Rated Load Q [kg]
Operational Speed v [m/s]
Suspension r
1800
0,8 - 2,0
1:1
2000
0,8 - 1,2
1:1
2500
0,63 - 1,6
2:1
3000
0,63 - 1,2
2:1
3500
0,63 - 1,0
2:1
TW160 on machine base frame
Technical Data Gear type
TW160
Axle distance
mm
225
Load on shaft (Ft)
kN
≤ 97 (rope departure direction downwards) 50:1 / 42:1 / 35:1 / 57:2 / 51:2 / 41:3
Ratios Oil filling
L
ca. 16,5
Type of oil Backlash Weight
synthetic gear oil °
0,015 - 0,06
kg
ca. 540
Motor
frequency-controlled
Type of protection - Motor
IP21
Hand wheel
IP55
D360 (plastic)
Actual Value Sensor (standard)
WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL WDG100-38-1024 HTL WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos
Actual Value Sensor (special) Operational Brake Type
TW160
Braking Torque
Nm
max. 2 x 245
Operational Voltage
VDC
180 - overexitation // 90 - retentive voltage
Trachtion Sheave Type
Standard
Diameter Traction Sheave
mm
Rim width
mm
640
max. Numerbrs of grooves (z x d) Weight
kg
140
720
SA 4/9 800
640
720
800
180
160
8 x 13, 7 x 16
7 x 13, 6 x 16
160
190
130
150
180 kproj. = see product catalog
Subject to modifications
40
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
41
W-Drives
W-Drives
W263C
Gears
For big travel heights & high loads • VVVF-motor (16 up tp 75 kW) controlled accurately • Horizontal rope departure (SA1) • Brake monitoring switch, manual brake release • Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction sheave shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9) • Part-Ex proof: wall bearing with vapour-proof shaft duct, extended drive shaft and suitable machine base frame (SA4) • Reinforced traction sheave shaft (SA13) • Gear according to ATEX • Brake magnets, Ex-proof (SA 15) • Double safety by dual-circuit shoe brake • Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 540, 640, 700, 740 or 800 mm • Gear, motor, traction sheave: approx. 1250 kg Special designs are possible
W263C horizontal right
Gears
W263C
PERFORMANCE DATA Rated Load Q [kg]
Operational Speed v [m/s]
Suspension r
2000
0,8 - 2,0
1:1
2200
0,8 - 1,2
1:1
3500
0,63 - 1,2
2:1
4000
0,63 - 1,0
2:1
4500
0,63 - 1,0
2:1
W263C horizontal left
Technical Data Gear type
W263C
Axle distance
mm
263
Load on shaft (Ft)
kN
≤ 84 (rope departure direction downwards) 49:1 / 40:1 / 60:2 / 50:2 / 41:2
Ratios Oil filling
L
ca. 20
Type of oil Backlash Weight
synthetic gear oil °
0,021 - 0,05
kg
1250
Motor
frequency-controlled
Type
DTE / DTL / 1LA6
Type of protection - Motor
IP23
handwheel
IP55
D360 (plastic)
Actual Value Sensor (standard)
WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL WDG100-38-1024 HTL / WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos
Actual Value Sensor (special) Operational Brake
Type
W263C
Braking Torque
Nm
max. 2 x 320
Operational Voltage
VDC
1180 - overexitation // 90 - retentive voltage kproj. = see product catalog
Traction Sheave
Type
Standard / SA 9 / SA 4
Diameter Traction Sheave
mm
540
Rim width
mm
160
max. Numerbrs of grooves (z x d)
640 160
215
180
215
740
800
160
215
160
215
7x13
8x13
7x13
8x13
6x16
8x16
6x16
8x16
5x18
7x18
5x18
7x18
195
230
225
265
8 x 10/11 7x13 6x16
Weight (incl. hub)
180
700
kg
125
150
8x13 7x16 160
8x16 180
8x13 7x16 185
8x16 210
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten
42
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
43
W-Drives
W-Drives
W332C
Gears
The well proven for big loads • VVVF-motor (16 up to 75 kW) controlled accurately • Horizontal rope departure (SA1) • Brake monitoring switch, manual brake release • Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction sheave shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9) • Part-Ex proof: wall bearing with vapour-proof shaft duct, extended drive shaft and suitable machine base frame (SA4) • Gear according to ATEX • Brake magnets, Ex-proof (SA 15) • Double safety by dual-circuit shoe brake • Low-wear traction sheave, available in Ø 640, 700, 740 or 800 mm • Gear, motor, traction sheave: approx. 1700 kg Special designs are possible
W332C horizontal right
Gears
W332C
PERFORMANCE DATA Rated Load Q [kg]
Operational Speed v [m/s]
Suspension r
2800
0,63 - 1,6
1:1
3200
0,63 - 1,2
1:1
4500
0,4 - 1,2
2:1
5500
0,4 - 1,0
2:1
6000
0,4 - 0,6
2:1
W332C horizontal left
Technical Data Gear type
W332C
Axle distance
mm
332
Load on shaft (Ft)
kN
≤ 155 (rope departure direction downwards) 63:1 / 47:1 / 59:2 / 46:2 / 57:3
Ratios Oil filling
L
ca. 33
Type of oil Backlash Weight
synthetic gear oil °
0,022 - 0,04
kg
1700
Motor
frequency controlled
Type
DTE / DTL / 1LA6
Type of protection - Motor
IP23
handwheel
IP55 D360 (plastic)
Actual Value Sensor (standard)
WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL WDG100-38-1024 HTL / WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos
Actual Value Sensor (special)
kproj. = see product catalog
Operational Brake
Type
W332C
Braking Torque
Nm
max. 2 x 625
Operational Voltage
VDC
180 - overexitation // 90 - retentive voltage
Traction Sheave Type
Standard / SA 9 / SA 4
Diameter Traction Sheave
mm
Rim width
mm
max. Numerbrs of grooves (z x d)
640 160
215
180
740 215
800
160
215
160
215
7x13
8x13
7x13
8x13
6x16
8x16
6x16
8x16
5x18
7x18
5x18
7x18
195
230
225
265
8 x 10/11 7x13 6x16
Weight (incl. hub)
180
700
kg
150
8x13 7x16 160
8x16 180
8x13 7x16 185
8x16 210
Subject to modifications
44
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
45
Gearmotors
Gearmotors
Elevator motors
Elevator motor for TW45C
Description of the motors
Gears
Gears
General description
All motors are constructed as three-phase current squirrel-cage motors and have either an internal ventilator on the motor shaft or forced ventilation. The motors with type of protection IP 21 are internally cooled, whereas the motors with the increase type of protection IP 55 are externally cooled. The frequency-controlled types (V3F) are designed as 4-pole motors. 4/16-pole versions of the motors are used for pole-changing operation (AC2). For the voltage-controlled version (ACVV), which are also 4/16-pole, the 16-pole winding by means of direct current braking is used for the speed controller. The motors are configured for thermal class F, but are only used up to thermal class B.
Motor CEG MT132S for Machine TW45C
Inspection of the motor temperature takes place via two and/or three flush mounted PTC thermistors in the motor winding. The mechanical power transmission of the motor to the gear takes place by means of a flexible coupling (the coupling is a constituent part of the gear). In emergency situations, the handwinding wheel on the motor can be used to turn the drive by hand after manual release of the operational and emergency brake. This enables the elevator car to be move to a landing to rescue trapped persons in the event of failure of the power supply. All motors are equipped with roller bearings.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Item Designation
Item Designation
1 Coupling hub
2 Motor flange
3 Load securing device
4 Terminal box
5 Connection for encoder
6 Cable gland for terminal box
7 Encoder
8 Handwinding wheel
Components of the elevator motors (DTE140 as an example)
Site conditions The following application conditions apply to all motors:
Standard motors Name Manufacturer Type Motor type designation TKAW Voltage/frequency S5-operation data Speed range Performance Torque Rated current Allowed starting torque Allowed starting current Effective power Cos Ø Efficiency Structural shape Type of protection Ventilation Handwinding wheel1) Kproj. Weight Real value generator (standard)
Unit
[V/Hz] [1/min] [kW] [Nm] [A] [Nm] [A] [V]
MT132STD 20197S C 5.2 400 1000 - 1249 4.2 - 5.2 40 70
[mm] [mm] [kg]
Real value generator (special)
• Maximum altitude: 1000 m amsl • Max. 40° C ambient temperature at max. 50% air humidity. The minimum ambient temperature should not fall below +5° C. Cf. also EN 81. • Max. rel. air humidity 90% at 20° C (without dewfall)
12.5 20 340 0.87 0.82
50
Technical data EME (CEG)
MT132STD 20193S C 7.0 400
340/42 180 c/h / 50% ED 1250 - 1800 1000 - 1249 5.2 5.6 - 7.0 40 - 28 54 63
88
IMB5/V1 IP54 internal ventilator D270 (plastic) 483 WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL WDG100-38-1024 HTL / WDG100-38-1024 Sinus/Cosinus
16.5 25 340 0.88 0.82
1250 - 1800 7.0 54 - 37 79
60
1) optional without handwinding wheel for location of machine in headroom/pit
If the site altitude of the motor is exceeded, the power outputs of the motors are to be reduced. If the maximum temperature is exceeded, the power outputs of the motors are to be reduced (cf. derating according to VDE 0530). An increase in power output even with reduced requirements is not possible!
46
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
47
Gearmotors
Gearmotors
Gears
Elevator motor for TW130
Gears
Elevator motor for TW63B
Motor CEG MT132S für Maschine TW63B Motor Siemens 1LG4 for TW130
Standardised motors for V3F (frequency-controlled)
Standard motors
Name Version Manufacturer
Name
Type Motor version name TKAW S5-operation data Speed range [1/min] Performance range [kW] Torque range [Nm] Rated current [A] Allowed starting torque [Nm] Allowed starting current [A] Effectiv power [V] Cos Ø Efficiency Structural shape Type of protection Ventilation handwinding wheel 1) [mm] Kproj. [mm] Weight [kg] Real value generator (standard) Real value generator (special)
Technical data frequency-controlled (VVVF) EME (CEG) Motorlift MT132STD MT132STD MT132STD CMRF160L1 20705S 22557S 22164S C 5.2 400 C 7.0 400 C 10.0 330 ML 13.0 400 TW63 00 TW63 00 TW63 00 TW63 00 180 c/h / 50% ED 1000 1250 1000 1250 1000 1250 1000 1250 1249 1800 1249 1800 1249 1650 1249 1650 4.2 - 5.2 5.2 5.6 - 7.0 7.0 8.0 - 10.0 10.0 10.5 - 13.0 13.0 40 40 - 28 54 54 - 37 77 77 - 58 100 100 - 75 12.5 16.5 28 32 70 63 88 79 125 170 20 25 44 48 340 340 290 340 0.87 0.88 0.84 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.85 0.85 2) BV6530-06/Bl.1 IP55 IP54 Internal ventilator D270 (plastic) 2) 539 577 2) 639 2) 56 62 70 TBD WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL WDG100-38-1024 HTL / WDG100-38-1024 Sinus/Cosinus
1) optional without handwinding wheel for location of machine in headroom / pit 2) motor with integrated special flange and enhanced motor terminal box for intermediate clamping of the brake magnets
On inquiry also pole changing motors are possible.
48
Issue 09/2017
Unit
Solution Manufacturer
Type Voltage / frequency S5 - operation data Speed range Nominal power Structural shape System of protection Ventilation
DTE132 - DTL180 V / Hz rpm kW
Handwinding
mm
Kproj. Real value generator (standard)
mm
Real value generator (special) 1) only for type 1LA6 166 and CMRF160 2) type DTL180 with forced ventilation 3) only for type DTE132
Technical data frequency-controlled (VVVF) Siemens ThyssenKrupp Aufzugswerke Motorlift 1LA6 166-4AA-11Z 1LA6 186-4AA-11Z 1LG4 220-4AA-31Z
CMRF160 see Product catalogue „Elevator motors“ 240 c/h / 50% ED 1250 - 1650 1250 - 1500 11 - 42 13 - 33.5 IMB5/V1 IP21 IP54/55 Internal ventilator2) D2703) / 360 D2701) / D360 (plastic) (plastic) see Product catalogue „Elevator motors“ WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL WDG100-38-1024 HTL WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos
Special motors For areas of application in which a standard version motor cannot be used, a custom-order type IMB5/V1 motor is used.
www.liftequip.com
49
Gearmotors
Gearmotors
Gears
Elevator motor for W-Drives
Gears
Elevator motor for TW160
Motor Siemens 1LG4 for TW160
Motor Siemens 1LG4 for W263C and W332C
Standard motors Name Solution
Standard motors Unit
Manufacturer Type Voltage / frequency S5 - operation data Speed range Rated output Structural shape System of protection Ventilation
V/Hz rpm kW
Handwinding wheel
mm
Kproj. Real value generator (standard)
mm
Real value generator (special)
Technical data Phase shift controlled (ACVV) Frequency-controlled (VVVF) ThyssenKrupp Siemens Siemens Aufzugswerke 1LA6 166-4AA-11Z LNLA 180 - 250 DTE132 - DTL180 1LG4 186-4AA-11Z 1LG4 220-4AA-31Z 400 / 50 4) 180 c/h / 40% ED 240 c/h / 50% ED 1270 - 1350 1250 - 1650 1250 - 1500 19 - 35 11 - 42 13 - 33.5 B9 IMB5 IP21 IP55 Forced ventilation Internal ventilator2) D360 D2703) / 360 D360 (plastic) (plastic) (plastic) See factory standard 4) WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL 2x64 WDG100-38-1024 HTL WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos
1) version depends on project specs. 2) type DTL180 with forced ventilation 3) only for type DTE132 4) see product catalogue elevator motors
Designation Solution
Unit
Manufacturer Type Factory standard Voltage / frequency S5 - operation data Speed range Rated output Structural shape System of protection
V / Hz rpm kW
Ventilation Handwinding wheel Kproj. Real value generator (standard) Real value generator (special)
mm mm
Technical data frequency-controlled (V3F) ThyssenKrupp Elevator Siemens 1LA6 ... DTE DTL DTE 140 S/L 180 S/M 180 M 180S 252 - 283 65 310 12 00 0 65 310 15 00 0 See factory standard 240 c/h / 50% ED 1250 - 1650 800 - 1050 1250 - 1500 16 - 20 27 / 33 37 / 42 185 48 / 75 IMB5 IP23 IP55 Forced Internal ventilator Internal ventilator ventilation D360 (plastic) See factory standard WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL WDG100-38-1024 HTL / WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos
Special motors For ranges of application in which a standard version motor cannot be used, a custom-order B9 or IMB5 type motor is used.
Special motors For ranges of application in which a standard version motor cannot be used, a custom-order type B9 or IMB5 motor is used.
50
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
51
Drum Drives
Drum Drives
Drum Drives
The illustration shows the design for a drum with 2:1 suspension.
In shafts with cramped space a drum drive is an alternative to a traction sheave lift with counterweight or hydraulic lift. In this case the lift is suspended on two ropes, coiled on a drum. Depending on the length of drum required, the installation can be carried out in an overhanging arrangement, comparable to traction sheave installation. In designs with outer bearing, the drive must be attached to two double T-profiles according to the SA9 design to bring the statically indeterminate three-point bearing back to a two-point bearing. Drum drives can be used for the modernisation of existing drum drives and new lifts, where, due to the space available (shaft floor space), no lift with counterweight or hydraulic jack can be employed. The installation is frequently planned in existing stairwells that are to be used as part of a building renovation to enable the comfort requirements of the customer regarding the building to be realised. The rope breaking force with only two cables limits the possible load of cage mass and load capacity, and define the required rope diameter. The defined in EN81-20 requirements for drum drives are defined as follows:
Gears
Gears
Drum Drives
Calculation tool rope drum Travel height
Drum drive TW130 without outer bearing
Drum drive TW63B with outer bearing
13,47
[m]
Car weight
1450
[Kg]
Ø-drum
400
[mm]
Rated load
1000
[Kg]
Ø-rope
10
[mm]
Rope strength
72,7
[kN]
Rope safety
12,1
Suspension
2
outer pillow block
n
1
8
[mm]
46,7
[kN]
9
[mm]
58,9
[kN]
10 [mm]
72,7
[kN]
11 [mm]
86,0
[kN]
12 [mm]
104,8
[kN]
13 [mm]
126,0
[kN]
[y/n]
Length (parallel) Length (centered)
Requirements of the standard EN81-20: • Minimum 2 cables, which are wound one layer • D/d (Drum/Rope): ≥ 40 • Rope diameter: ≥ 8 mm • Rope safety: ≥ 12 • Speed max. 0,63 m/s
:
X
551
[mm]
581
[mm]
Drako H250
Rope strength
The table shows model designs with reference to 12 m conveyance height. In the event of queries the design must be realised on the basis of customer data. Technical Data
The UCM requirement can either be realised with an NBS system or a safety catch. Coiling of both ropes can be achieved either in parallel or from the outside to the centre. Given the axis load, coiling from the outside to the centre is preferable.
Rated load max. Q [kg] Car weight max. F [kg] Total load F+Q [kg] Rated speed v [m/s] Suspension Travel height max. [m] Machine type Ratio Drum -Ø [mm] Drum length [mm] Number of ropes Rope -Ø [mm] (Drako 250 H) Dissipated heat [kJ/h] Motor output [kW] Motor current [A]
450 300 750 0,5
525 400 925 0,63
TW63B 48:1 33:1 360 360 240 265 8 1850 6,5 14,4
9 2615 9,3 25,5
800 550 1350 0,5
800 550 1350 0,63 1:1 12 TW130 42:1 35:1 450 450 300 300 2 10 11 3185 4183 11,8 14,5 26,8 44,5
1000 700 1700 0,5
1000 700 1700 0,63
1200 800 2000 0,63
50:1 520 300
TW160 41:1 520 300
35:1 520 300
11 4232 14,7 46,0
12 5483 18,1 41,2
13 6623 22,2 52,4
For higher loads the W-series is available on request.
Our whole range of options, for example emergency brake system (NBS), Ex-protection or vertical motors is available for you. If you cannot find the suitable machine in the matrix above, please contact us, together we will find a solution for higher loads or special applications. Rope coiling centrally coiled
52
Rope coiling coiled in parallel
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
53
Drum Drives
Drum Drives
Technical Report
Technical Report
Possible uses and solution version Based on the shaft loading, it is possible to define whether a drum with overhanging arrangement (Figure 4) is viable or whether the drum has to be designed with outer bearings (Figures 6 and 7).
Drum drives – Possible uses and solution versions Volker Lenzner1), Frank Eßer2)
Apart from the standard lift drive concepts with traction sheave drives with counterweight balance or hydraulics, there is another drive concept with geared unit and rope drum. In the case of the drum drive, the lift car is suspended on the rope and the drive machine coils up the rope attached to the drum, in a manner similar to a crane, on the drum (Figures 4 to 6). Due to the torque needed, worm gear is preferred as drives with corresponding adjustment for attachment of the drum. This lift system dispenses with a counterweight to enable the entire shaft cross-section to be used for the car. This lift concept is also suitable for replacing existing hydraulic lifts. These systems are used as replacement drives for pre-existing
lifts or in modernisation, when the car floor area is reduced by retrofitting of car separation doors and automatic landing doors. Against the background of demographic change, growing requirements for handicapped friendly accessibility of buildings and comfort requirements, it may be technically necessary to realise a lift solution in an existing stairwell with cramped space. In this case a lift with drum drive makes sense.
Figure 3: Rope end attachment
D/d (drum diameter to rope
In the case of a layout with outer bearings, the statically indeterminate triple bearing must be led back via the hinged column below the drive to a double bearing. Since with increasing gross weight and greater traction sheave diameter, the drive power required of the geared drive increases as does the size of the geared drive, the potential installation situation must be examined to determine
diameter) greater than 40 Rope safety greater than 12
In terms of regulatory standards, both EN 81-1 (see 9.2.2., 9.2.3.2, 9.4 and 10.3.2) as well as EN 81-20 (see 5.5.2.2, 5.5.4) make the following demands on the use of drum drives: Minimum number of two ropes,
coiled in a single layer
Figure 1: Example for a rope test and determination of drum length.
max. speed of lift 0.63 m/s No restriction regarding the type of
suspension (1:1 or 2:1) Since the mass of the car and the load-bearing capacity are suspended without balancing mass on both ropes, the rope-breaking force must be considered in reference to the total mass. Through the use of ropes with high breaking force (e.g. Drako 250h or equivalent) and a low lift car mass, a good economic solution can be found here too.
Figure 7: Geared unit TW63horizontal with drum and traction sheave with outer bearing on frame Figure 4: Geared drive TW130 horizontal with drum and overhanging traction sheave
The rope diameter required and the resulting minimum drum diameter are derived from the information of loadbearing capacity (Q) and lift car mass (F). The rope safety also has to be checked (Figure 1).
1) LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Figure 2: Rope coiling (centrally coiled or coiled in parallel)
Figure 5: MFR frequency inverter with integrated regenerative braking
2) Rudolf Fuka GmbH
German edition: LIFT-REPORT
42. Jahrg. (2016)
Heft 1
Issue 09/2017
whether the often cramped space is sufficient. If necessary, guidance of the rope can be realised via a guided diverted pulley, depending on the site circumstances. Compensation of the different rope extension of both ropes must be achieved via attachment to a “rocker.”
Since drum lifts have to meet the requirements based on EN81-1 (see 9.11) or of EN81-20 (5.6.7), the subject of UCM (A3) also has to be considered. There are two possible solutions for this: the first is a design with an emergency braking system (NBS) on the geared drive if the space available in the geared drive layout permits this. The other solution is to realise the UCM case via a safety catch acting on both sides. Since the lift can only leave the stop downwards due to load conditions, only a potential electrical fault needs to be considered for the upwards direction when leaving the stop. The electrical power must undergo a three-phase shutdown when passing the final stops to ensure safe stopping of the lift car via limit switches according to EN81-1 (see 10.5.2.2. and 10.5.3.1) and EN 81-20 (5. 8. 1. 2 and 5. 12. 2).
Market situation While the drum drive used to be very much a niche product, the demand and project situation has altered greatly in recent years. To cope with this situation the two
To operate lifts with drum drives especially economically, use of a frequency inverter with regenerative braking is advisable. Measurements on lifts have shown that the share of regenerative braking can amount to 60 to 70%. This means that as a result of regenerative braking, a lift system of comparable effectiveness with a traction sheave lift with 50% counterweight compensation can be achieved in terms of energy efficiency.
The length of the rope drum required depends on the conveyance height, the type of suspension and coiling direction of both ropes (Figure 2). Coiling from the outside inwards (groove in the middle) is preferable due to the axis load, since the load centre is always the same.
54
Figure 6: Geared unit TW130 with drum and traction sheave with outer bearing on frame
Minimum rope diameter 8 mm
Drive design
22
since the regenerative braking unit is integrated in the inverter without additional hardware costs. All regulatory standard requirements for regenerative braking have been met.
Technical Report - Drum Drives
Technical Report - Drum Drives
Possible uses and solution version
German edition: LIFT-REPORT
www.liftequip.com
42. Jahrg. (2016)
The MFR inverter (Figure 5) with integrated regenerative braking of LiftEquip is a very economical solution here, Heft 1
Figure 8: Geared unit TW130 V with drum below with outer bearing and diverter pulley on frame
23
55
Emergency Brake System NBS
Drum Drives
Technical Report
20/ -50
-conform
Summary Lifts with a drum drive are a special solution that not only represent a good technical solution, especially for installations in cramped spaces, but are also economical. The regulatory standard requirements from EN81-1 have not been changed in EN81-20; allowance must be made for the UCM aspect. Different arrangements of the drive and requirements for the rope coiling can be realised on a project-related basis.
Consequently this drive concept is not only an option as a replacement solution for existing drum drives, it can also be used in retrofitting of a new lift or as replacement for a hydraulic lift. The use of regenerative frequency inverters – MFR with integrated regeneration – is advisable in combination with a drum drive, since up to 50% of the energy can be saved through regenerative braking, depending on the lift constellation.
Gears
Technical Report - Drum Drives
Possible uses and solution version companies FUKA and LiftEquip have developed a joint concept. An altered load population was considered in this regard for the calculation of the worm drive and defined as an overall concept by a standardisation of the drums (diameter and length of the blanks). Together with the production facilities for corresponding machine frames, in particular for designs with outer bearings from Fuka, a wide range of solutions can now also be offered here economically (Figure 8).
Emergency Brake System NBS
EN 81-
Space saving, simple, costeffective Certified and type approved according to EN 81-20/-50
Control unit (mounting on machine room wall or in control cabinet)
Control System
We provide you with a well thought out and calculated package of solutions: Machine with emergency brake, overspeed governor including a switch for overspeed and a separate control-unit. Together, those components form a closed and operable system. This systemic solution spares you time consuming self-made constructions bearing unforeseeable costs. Compact Design Our emergency brake is mounted on the drive shaft vis-à-vis the traction sheave: A configuration, which offers you a space saving solution. Easy Conversion To modernize your lift installation the addition of the following components to the drive suffices: an additional
Additional switch at overspeed governor
safety switch at the overspeed governor and a separate control unit with a voltage supply for wall-mounted installation in the machine room.
Terminal box for intermediate control -Brake port -Ventilation monitoring -Temperature monitoring Emergency Brake NBS
Continuous Availability The emergency brake system is optionally available for the following geared drives: TW 45C, TW63B, TW130, TW160.
Motor
Braking device against overspeed according to EN 8120 /5.6.6 and against unintentional movement of the car according EN 81-20 /5.6.7.
Technical Data
24
German edition: LIFT-REPORT
42. Jahrg. (2016)
Heft 1
Machine
Rated Load Q [kg]*
Suspension r
Brake Torque [Nm]
TW 45C
500 / 1000
1:1 / 2:1
1200
TW 63B
1125 / 2100
1:1 / 2:1
2200
TW 130
1800 / 3500
1:1 / 2:1
4000
TW 160
2200 / 4750
1:1 / 2:1
5500
* maximum values depending on speed v
56
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
57
Mini-Gearless
PMC- / DAF-Series Gearless
Own Notes ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
PMC - DAF Product Description
60
Performance Matrix
61
PMC125 S / M / L
62
PMC145-2 S/XS
63
PMC145-2 M/XM
64
PMC145-2 L/XL
65
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
PMC170 S - XL
67
DAF210 M / L
68
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
DAF270 S / M / L / XL
70
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Machine Base Frame for PMC - Gearless
74
Machine Base Frame for DAF - Gearless
75
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Modernisation solution 'Geard to Gearless'
76
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Colouring for all Drives
100
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
58
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
59
Mini-Gearless
Mini-Gearless
PMC - DAF
20/ -50
With our synchronous gearless series (PMC and DAF) one of the
-conform
Range of synchronous gearless machines for MRL application a manual venting lever is possible.
smooth running drive for your lift.
Another option of the PMC series is a handwheel extension.
Compact The compact design is a significant
most compact drives is available for deployment in energy efficient
Complete
advantage for using the drives in
modernisation / or system solutions,
We can provide you with the matc-
your systems.
ideally suited for energy recovery.
hing frequency inverter (MFR: with
These series stand out as excellent
integrated power regeneration; MFC:
Reliable
value for money. Excellent ef-
with braking resistor) in each case
Durable, sturdy construction, pro-
ficiencies with low energy consump-
for our gearless drives, which feature
mising exceptionally long service
tion.
all of the drive parameters required.
life and availability and sustainable
In this way we guarantee fast, safe
economic efficiency.
Safe A safety brake is used in all gearless drives available from LiftEquip, which is licensed as type-tested safety brake against excessive speed upwards in accordance with EN 81-20/-50. Rope guard acc. to EN 81-77 up to earthquake category 3. Flexible The drives can be used both in the shaft (MRL) as well as in the machine room. The arrangement can be configured in 1:1 and 2:1 suspension. A design version of the brake with
start-up. Optionally in plug&play version with integrated brake control,
EN 81-20/-50
line filter, line inductor and contac-
Our drives meet all requirements with
tors.
regard to the above standards, in par-
In addition, we provide various
ticular the approval of safety brakes
machine frames, perfectly adapted
and the rope guard.
to these drives. Special designs are available on request. Smooth running The traction sheaves we use are precisely manufactured and supplied with hardened grooves. As a result we guarantee you a long service life, low vibrations and an extremely
suspension m/s ft/min kg lbs 320 450 480 630 908 2000 1000 1050 1135 2500 1150 1250 1350 1362 3000 1400 1590 3500 1600 1650 1700 1800 1816 4000 1900 2000 2042 4500 2200 2250 2270 5000 2400 2500
1,00 200
1,50
1,60
PMC...S 1451)/1252)
PMC145XS
PMC...M 1451)/1252)
PMC145XM
PMC…L 1451)/1253)
PMC145XL
2:1 1,75 2,00 350
80m 80m
2,50 500
PMC 145XL / DAF 210M DAF DAF 270S 210L
3,00
Gearless
Gearless
Product Description
Efficient
Performance Matrix
EN 81-
3,50 700
DAF270M
PMC170S DAF210L PMC 170M
PMC 170L
PMC 170XL
135m
100m
100m 45m DAF 270M
80m
80m
DAF270L
Travel height datadata can vary on car weight check with the A TLD is necessary. Travel height candepending vary depending onetc. carA weight etc. check with the TLD is necessary. 1) PMC145 is designed for 240 Starts/h 2) PMC125S/M are designed for 120 Starts/h 3) PMC125L is designed for 180 Starts/h
Notice:
60
Issue 09/2017
1) PMC145 is designed for 240 Starts/h 2) PMC125S/M are designed for 120 Starts/h 3) PMC125L is designed for 180 Starts/h
www.liftequip.com
28.08.2017
61
Mini-Gearless
Mini-Gearless
PMC125 S / M / L*
EN 81-
20/ -50
20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
Gearless
-conform
PMC125S
PMC145-2 S/XS
EN 81-
PMC125M PMC125L*
PMC145-2S
PMC145-2XS
Technical Data Type of machine
PMC125S001
Suspension
r
Rated Load
Q
PMC125M002 2:1
[kg]
PMC125L003* 1:1
450 / 480
480
630
320
240
240
Technical Data
2:1
500
750
800
1000
Rated Speed max.
v
[m/s]
Diameter of Traction Sheave
DT
[mm]
240
Diameter of Ropes
d
[mm]
6 / 6,5
6 / 6,5
8
6 / 6,5
6 / 6,5
6 / 6,5
8
6 / 6,5
Number of Grooves max. 1)
z
4
5
4
6
10
7
6
10
1,0
Groove type
320
seat / vee groove, hardened
Rated Power
PN
[kW]
2,8
Rated Torque
MN
[Nm]
170
230
Permitted radial Shaft Load
[kN]
13
14
Weight
[kg]
127
2,9
Duty Cycle
%
Rated Current
IN
[A]
Output Factor
cos
φ [Nm]
Braking Torque
3,8
Rated Speed max.
v [m/s]
Diameter of Traction Sheave
DT [mm]
Diameter of Ropes
d [mm] z
4,7
5,9
Number of Grooves max.
280
350
Groove type
1,0
1,6 240 6
6 at groove clearance 12 mm / 7 at groove clearance 10 mm seat / vee groove, hardened
Rated Power
PN [kW]
1,59 190
2,8
4,4
170
165
Rated Torque
MN [Nm]
Permitted radial Shaft Load
[kN]
14
15
40
50
Weight
[kg]
132
158
137
10,2 0,89
2 x 210
204
193
14,6
14,9
11,9
14,9
Number of Switching Operations
0,91
0,91
0,93
0,91
Duty Cycle
%
Rated Current
IN [A]
Output Factor
cos φ
2 x 300
2 x 500
Protection Class
IP 21 [dB(A)] 5.5
MFC
21-15, 31-10
50 8,4
7,5
9,9
0,92
0,91
0,96
2 x 250 Nm, 2-surface disc brake in double configuration (2 brake circuits)
Brake Monitoring
< 60
MFR
180
Designation
1 microswitch per brake circuit
Protection Class 7.5 21-15, 31-15
* The machine PMC125L is likely to be available from the 4th quarter of 2017 onwards.
Subject to techn. modifications. For further information please refer to the current product catalog PMC125 drive
62
450
180
7,9
with standardised groove clearance RA 12 mm for d=6/6,5 and 14 mm for d=8 mm
2:1
275
4,4
1 microswitch per brake circuit
1)
1:1
Q [kg]
350
Brake Monitoring
Frequency inverter type
r
Rated Load
2,9
2-surface disc brake in double configuration (2 brake circuits)
Designation
PMC145-2XS
Suspension
350
25
PMC145-2S
120
150
Number of Switching Operations
Noise level
240
Type of machine
Issue 09/2017
Frequency inverter type
IP 21 MFR MFC
5.5 31-10
31-15
Subject to techn. modifications. For further information please refer to the current product catalog PMC145-2 drive
www.liftequip.com
63
Mini-Gearless
Mini-Gearless
EN 81-
Produktkatalog Antrieb PMC145-2®
20/ -50
20/ -50
-conform
-conform
Treibscheibenseite für Treibscheibendurchmesser 240mm, 210mm und 320mm
Produktkatalog Antrieb PMC145-2® PMC145-L
PMC145-M PMC145-2XM
PMC145-2L
PMC145-2M
PMC145-2XL
PMC145-2L
View from above
PMC145-2M
Bottom view
Bottom view
Sideview
Sideview
View from above
Gearless
2.4.8
PMC145-2 L/XL
EN 81-
Technik
Abb. 2.4-9 Technical Data
Technical Data PMC145-2M Pos. Bezeichnung
Type of machine 1:1
Ansicht von unten
2:1
Ansicht 480von oben
630
Suspension
r
Rated Load
Q [kg]
Rated Speed max.
v [m/s]
Diameter of Traction Sheave
DT [mm]
Diameter of Ropes
d [mm]
8
6
Number of Grooves max.
z
5
8/9
1 4003
300 1,0 320
1,2
240
210
Type of Groove
240
1,0 320
PMC145-2XM Pos. Bezeichnung
Type of machine
2
Seitenansicht
Suspension
r
450
Rated Load
Q [kg]
1,6
240
210
1,75 240
Rated Power
PN [kW]
Rated Torque
MN [Nm]
Permitted radial Shaft Load
[kN]
Weight
[kg]
1,79
Duty Cycle
%
Rated Current
IN [A]
Output Factor
cos φ
2,38
2,72
2,86
285
11,5
DT [mm]
8
Diameter of Ropes
d [mm]
8
6
6
Number of Grooves max.
z
6
10 / 11 / 13
3,91
3,9
6
6,9
5,5
Rated Power
PN [kW]
235
205
225
236
220
Rated Torque
MN [Nm]
Permitted radial Shaft Load
[kN]
19 202
Weight Version 02/2015Number of Switching Operations
32240
9,5
0,93
8,3 0,94
320
14,8
15,6
0,97
13,9
0,96
10002
800unten Ansicht von
Ansicht von oben 1,0 1,2 240
320
240
1,6
8
6
10 / 11 / 13
6
[kg]
2,76
3,69
4,2
4,42
440
4,7
6,01
6
9,4
10,2
8
375
360
315
352
350
320
32 225
216
214
216
30 225
216
214
%
Rated Current
IN [A]
Output Factor
cos φ
40 18,3
15,5
14,9
13
1 microswitch per brake circuit
IP 21
Protection Class
IP 21
MFC
21-15 / 31-15
Subject to techn. modifications. For further information please refer to the current product catalog PMC145-2 drive
24,7
24,6
22,4
0,93 0,94 0,93 0,92 0,95 0,96 ThyssenKrupp Aufzugswerke 33 2 x 550 Nm, 2-surface disc brake in double configuration (2 brake circuits)
Brake Monitoring
Frequency inverter type
238
50
1 microswitch per brake circuit 7.5
229
180
Duty Cycle
Brake Monitoring
5.5
2,0 320
6
Version of Brake
MFR
1,75 240
8
2 x 350 Nm, 2-surface disc brake in double configuration (2 brake circuits)
Frequency inverter type
630 Seitenansicht
210
Version of Brake Protection Class
Bezeichnung
2:1Pos.
seat / vee groove, hardened
3,1
9,9 0,92
210
v [m/s]
Diameter of Traction Sheave
50 0,93
240
Rated Speed max.
320
245
185 ThyssenKrupp Aufzugswerke 180
1,0
1 630 3
500
PMC145-2XL
Bezeichnung
Type of Groove
18
0,94
PMC145-2L 1:1Pos.
2,0
seat / vee groove, hardened
Number of Switching Operations
64
Gearless
PMC145-2 M/XM
MFR
7.5
18
MFC
21-15 / 31-15
21-32 / 31-26
Version
Subject to techn. modifications. For further information please refer to the current product catalog PMC145-2 drive
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
65
Mini-Gearless
Own Notes
PMC170 S - XL
EN 81-
20/ -50
Gearless
-conform
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Dimensions L (mm)
D (mm)
E (mm)
F (mm)
H (mm)
S (mm)
G (kg)
PMC170S
180
613
426
300
706
273
381
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
PMC170M
240
673
486
360
766
304
423
PMC170L
270
703
516
390
796
319
448
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
PMC170XL
330
763
576
450
856
350
492
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Technical Data
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
PMC170S
Type of machine
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
r
Rated Load
Q [kg]
1050 1,6
Rated Speed max.
v [m/s]
Diameter of Traction Sheave
DT [mm]
Diameter of Ropes
d [mm]
Number of Grooves max.
z
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
66
Issue 09/2017
PMC170XL
1650 1,0
1,6
1,75
2,0
8 10 seat / vee groove, hardened
Rated Power
PN [kW]
9,7
Rated Torque
MN [Nm]
485
Permitted radial Shaft Load
[kN]
30
42
40
42
Weight
[kg]
381
423
448
492
Number of Switching Operations
9,8
15,6
17,1
19,5
781
180
240
Duty Cycle
%
Rated Current
IN [A]
23
27
40
45
Output Factor
cos φ
0,95
0,94
0,95
0,94
50
Version of Brake
2 x 1200 Nm, 2-surface disc brake in double configuration
Brake Monitoring
1 microswitch per brake circuit
Protection Class
IP 21
Frequency inverter type
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
PMC170L
320
Type of Groove
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
PMC170M 2:1
Suspension
18
MFR MFC
31-26
-31-40
31-60
Subject to techn. modifications. For further information please refer to the current product catalog PMC170 drive
www.liftequip.com
67
Mini-Gearless
Mini-Gearless
DAF210M
EN 81-
DAF210L
EN 81-
20/ -50
20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
Gearless
-conform
Technical Data
Technical Data DAF210M
Type of machine Suspension
r
1:1
Rated Load
Q [kg]
450
Rated Speed max.
v [m/s]
Diameter of Traction Sheave
DT [mm]
Type of machine 2:1
1,0
630 1,6
320
700
630
1,0 360
700
630
1,6 320
360
700 1,75
320
360
320
Suspension
r
630
Rated Load
Q [kg]
2,0
Rated Speed max.
v [m/s]
360
Diameter of Traction Sheave
DT [mm]
1:1
2:1
630 1,0
630/900/1000/1125
630/900/1000/1125
1,0
1,6
520/400/360/320
520/400/360/320
1,6 320
Diameter of Ropes
d [mm]
8
8/9
8
8/9
8
8/9
8
8/9
Diameter of Ropes
d [mm]
8
8-13
Number of Grooves max.
z
5
5/4
5
5/4
5
5/4
5
5/4
Number of Grooves max.
z
7
5-8
Type of Groove
Type of Groove
seat / vee groove, hardened
5,75
4,7/5,9/6,6/6,5/7,5
7,4/9,5/10,5/11,5
11,3/12,4
12,5
575
610/590/586/520/600
600/595/590/575
580/565
563
Permitted radial Shaft Load
[kN]
for 320-, 360- and 400-traction sheave 38 (≤ 75 1/min) / 46 (> 75 1/min) for 520-traction sheave 37 (≤ 75 1/min) / 41 (> 75 1/min)
240
Weight
[kg]
320/325/330
50
Number of Switching Operations
6,8
7,3
7,2
380
382
365
370
Permitted radial Shaft Load
[kN]
Weight
[kg]
Rated Current
IN [A]
Output Factor
cos φ
7,9
8,0 360
33 (≤ 75 1/min) / 37 (> 75 1/min) 250
60
12,5
12,0 0,94
10,5
16,1
0,95
0,96
16,2
17,4
15,4
17,2
0,95
Version of Brake
2-surface disc brake in double configuration (2 brake circuits)
Brake Monitoring
1 microswitch per brake circuit
Protection Class
IP 20
Frequency inverter type
seat / vee groove, hardened 650
4,7
378
50
360
4,10
4,2
430
%
320
MN [Nm]
4,3
450
Duty Cycle
2,0
PN [kW]
2,83
180
1000
1,75
Rated Torque
PN [kW] MN [Nm]
240
1125
Rated Power
Rated Power Rated Torque
Number of Switching Operations
MFR
5.5
7.5
MFC
31-15
31-26
Duty Cycle
240 %
50
Rated Current
IN [A]
16,0
14,0
15,4/15/15,2/13/16,8
23,4/23,2/23,0/25,5
25,7/25,1
25,0
Output Factor
cos φ
0,94
0,95
0,96/0,94/0,95
0,96/0,95/0,95
0,95/0,96
0,96
Version of Brake
2-surface disc brake in double configuration (2 brake circuits)
Brake Monitoring
1 microswitch per brake circuits
Protection Class
IP 20
Frequency inverter type
Subject to techn. modifications. For further information please refer to the current product catalog Mini gearless DAF210
68
DAF210L
MFR
7.5
MFC
31-15
18 31-26/40
31-40
Subject to techn. modifications. For further information please refer to the current product catalog Mini gearless DAF210
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
69
Mini-Gearless
Mini-Gearless
DAF270S
EN 81-
DAF270M
EN 81-
20/ -50
20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
Gearless
-conform
Technical Data
Technical Data
Type of machine
Type of machine
DAF270S
DAF270M
2:1
Suspension
r
1250
Rated Load
Q [kg]
Rated Speed max.
v [m/s]
1:1
2:1
Suspension
r
Rated Load
Q [kg]
Rated Speed max.
v [m/s]
Diameter of Traction Sheave
DT [mm]
Diameter of Ropes
d [mm]
8
Diameter of Ropes
d [mm]
8-11
Number of Grooves max.
z
10
Number of Grooves max.
z
7-9
1,0
1,6
1,75
2,0
2,5
Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm]
320
Type of Groove PN [kW]
8
Rated Torque
MN [Nm]
640
Permitted radial Shaft Load
[kN]
43,5
Weight incl. traction sheave
[kg]
475
Number of Switching Operations
[F/h]
240
Duty Cycle
[%]
50
Rated Current
IN [A]
23
30,7
Output Factor
cos φ
0,94
0,95
12,6
13,8 630
7,8/10,6
600
570
Rated Torque
MN [Nm]
1200/1175
1075/1050
27,8 0,96
IP20, optional IP54 MFC
31-26
31-40
21-50R
1,75
440
520
1150 1350 2,0
440
1600
2,5 440
520
15,3/14,9 14,2 16,3/16,7 15,8
18,2
16,6
19,5
21,6
1175 1175 1250 1050 1050/1025 1050 1025/1050 1025
1000
860
860
950
9
10,7 11,4 13
Permitted radial Shaft Load [kN]
43,5/58
Weight incl. traction sheave [kg] Number of Switching Operations Duty Cycle %
550/570 180
240
180
240
180
40
50
40
50
40
Rated Current
IN [A]
27,5 24,5 24
Output Factor
cos φ
0,96
440
0,94
25
22
30
0,92 0,93 0,95
24
240 50
24 25,5 30
0,94
180
30/35
30
0,94 0,95 0,95/0,94
35/30,5
35
0,95
38/29 32,7 41,5/28,5 31,4 0,96/0,95 0,96 0,95/0,96 0,96
Version of Brake
2-surface disc brake in double configuration 2x1250 / 2x1700 Nm option: with manual release
Brake Monitoring
1 microswitch per brake circuit
Frequency inverter type
Subject to techn. modifications. For further information please refer to the current product catalog Mini gearless DAF270
1600 520
Protection Class
--
1350
seat / vee groove, hardened 5,4/7,4
29,2
1600 1,6
320 520 320/440 520
PN [kW]
1 microswitch per brake circuit
Frequency inverter type
440
Rated Power
Brake Monitoring
18
320
1,0
17,8
Version of Brake
MFR
440
1,6
15
2-surface disc brake in double configuration 2x1700 Nm option: with manual release
Protection Class
1,0
Type of Groove
seat / vee groove, hardened
Rated Power
900 800 1000 900 800 1000 1350 1600 2000 1350
IP20, optional IP54 MFR MFC
18 31-26/40
31-26
-31-40
31-48
31-60
21-50R
Subject to techn. modifications. For further information please refer to the current product catalog Mini gearless DAF270
70
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
71
Mini-Gearless
Mini-Gearless
EN 81-
DAF270XL
EN 81-
20/ -50
20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
-conform
Gearless
DAF270L
Option: with manual release
Technical Data Type of machine
Technical Data
DAF270L
Type of machine
1:1
2:1
DAF270XL
Suspension
r
Rated Load
Q [kg]
1100/1000
Rated Speed max.
v [m/s]
1,0/1,6
Diameter of Traction Sheave
DT [mm]
440
Diameter of Ropes
d [mm]
8-11
8-12
Diameter of Ropes
d [mm]
Number of Grooves max.
z
7
6-10
Number of Grooves max.
z
2000/2250/2500 1,0
1900 2000 1900 1900
1,6
1,75
490/440
520
Type of Groove
1,8
490
2200/2000
1700
2,0
520
520
440/490
520
PN [kW]
6,6/10,1
Rated Torque
MN [Nm]
1475/1400
Permitted radial Shaft Load
[kN]
58
Weight
[kg]
730/740
Number of Switching Operations
11,7/12,8/14,6 18/20,4/23,3 1433/1400/ 1600
240
1375/1400/ 1600
1800/2000
Rated Load
Q [kg]
1100/1000
2,5
Rated Speed max.
v [m/s]
1,0/1,6
490/440
%
50
Rated Current
IN [A]
26/24,5
25/36/41/28
Output Factor
cos φ
0,96
0,96/0,95
Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm]
440
21,2
24,6/22,5
25,1
26,5/30
Rated Power
PN [kW]
1375
1350/1375
1300
1300/1325
Rated Torque
MN [Nm] 1475/1400
Permitted radial Shaft Load
[kN]
Weight
[kg]
42,5/43,5/36/ 43,5 50/41 0,96/0,94
43,5
43,5
60
41,5/60/ 35/60
0,95
58
58/40/59
0,96
1,0
440
seat / vee groove, hardened
19,4
50
4000
1,0/1,6
6-10
1400
50/40
4000/3400
2,5
8-13
20
240/180
2000
7
1400
240
Number of Switching Operations
6,6/10,1
12,2/12,8/14,6 17,3/20,4/23,3
24,6
30
22,5/30,5
25,1
1400/1600
1350
1325
1650/1400
1380
73 770/780 240
240/180 50
240
240/180
Duty Cycle
%
50/40
50
Rated Current
IN [A]
26/24,5
36/41/28
43,5/36/50/41
41,5/60
Output Factor
cos φ
0,96
0,96/0,95
0,96/0,94
0,96
40
59
42,5/51,5/62
56
0,93
0,96/0,94
0,96
Version of Brake
2-surface disc brake in double configuration 2x2200 option: with manual release
2-surface disc brake in double configuration 2x1700 option: with manual release
Brake Monitoring
1 microswitch per brake circuit
Brake Monitoring
1 microswitch per brake circuit
Protection Class
IP20, optional IP54
Protection Class
IP20, optional IP54
Frequency inverter type
18
18 / --
18
--
MFC
31-40
31-60
31-60
31-60 / 21-105
Frequency inverter type
--
MFR MFC
180
50/40
Version of Brake
MFR
4:1
2,0
8-11
Type of Groove
3:1 2200
1,6 520*/440
1,8
180
1800/2000/2250/2500 1,0
1400
240/180
Duty Cycle
2:1
r
seat / vee groove, hardened
Rated Power
1:1
Suspension
31-40
31-60
31-60
21-105
Subject to techn. modifications. For further information please refer to the current product catalog Mini gearless DAF270
Subject to techn. modifications. For further information please refer to the current product catalog Mini gearless DAF270
72
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
73
Mini-Gearless
Mini-Gearless
ModKit MO61 S / E
Machine base frame for DAF - Gearless
DAF210 on TW63B machine base frame
ModKit MO61 D4
DAF270 on machine base frame
Gearless
Gearless
Machine base frame for PMC - Gearless
Option: manual release
AS L5 Mo 55 AS dKit M 765 m L5 m O Mo 55 - 1 61 S dKit 20 MO 6 mm 61 E
For more information see description ModKit MO61S / E
For more information see description ModKit MO61 D4
Technical Data
Technical Data Frame Machine Suspension
r
Rated load
Q [kg]
Rated speed
v [m/s]
Rope departure at drive flexible
[mm]
ModKit MO 61 S*
ModKit MO 61 E
MODKit MO61 D4
PMC145-2 M, L
PMC125 M, L PMC145-2 M, L
PMC145-2 M, L, XL 2.1
bis 630
up to 630
1,0 from 555 to 765
Diameter of traction sheave
DT [mm] d [mm]
up to 1,6 from 595 to 1206
210 / 240 6 / 6,5
z
Type of groove
r
ASL-dimension flexible*
[mm]
Diameter of traction sheave
DT [mm]
Diameter of ropes
d [mm]
DT [mm]
240
DAF210L
DAF270S/M/L 1:1
481 - 1073 320 / 360
Adapter plat
501 - 1097
515 - 1265
360 / 400
320 / 440 / 520
8 / 10
8 / 10 / 11 Yes
Yes
depending on the traction sheave diameter
12
Rope guard optional
Yes
12
Manual release optional
Yes
150 / 240
* ASL-dimension is dependent on the traction sheave 240
Yes No (1:1)
Integrated rope end fastening points, rope anchorages Manual release, optional Hoist * ▶ Pre-assemble machine base frame on stock ▶ Machine available from stock
DAF270 on machine base frame
6 / 6,5
seat / vee groove, hardened
Vibration isolation elements
74
600 ≤ ASL ≤ 1400 240
6 / 6,5 / 8
Number of ropes max.
Pulley diameter
up to 1000
DAF210M
Suspension
Vibration isolation elements
Diameter of ropes Number of grooves max.
Machine
1:1 up to 675
DAF210 on TW63 machine base frame
Frame
Yes
Further special frames on request. Contact us!
Yes No
Yes
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
75
Mini-Gearless
Mini-Gearless
DAF210
Modernisation solution "Geared to Gearless"
Example with DAF210L
DAF270
Rope departure in downward direction:
Gearless
Gearless
Modernisation solution "Geared to Gearless"
Rope departure in upward direction:
A flexible solution, adjustable to the specific situation of the machine room Existing situation
Possible solution
Szenario 1 Geared drive with extended shaft (SA9), Traction sheave located in the lift shaft and machine room located beside the lift shaft.
A gearless drive is installed in the already existing opening. The machine frame is especially designed to provide support upwards and downwards.
Advantages of this example: • Energy-efficient Gearless Technology • No additional safety gears required as the brake of the machine is certified for the overspeed in upward direction • no replacement of the rope pulleys in the lift shaft required
Szenario 2 Geared drive is mounted below the lift shaft, the machine room is located under the lift shaft, rope departure in upward direction.
The gearless machine frame is especially designed for rope departure in upward direction. A support with isolations is included.
Usage parameters: Q ≤ 630 kg / 2:1 / 1,0 m/s / diameter = 520 mm / 13 mm ropes
Szenario 3 Geared drive is mounted above the lift shaft, the machine room is located abovethe lift shaft, rope departure in downward direction.
76
The gearless machine frame is especially designed for a rope departure in downward direction. A support with isolations is included.
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
77
ModKit
MO61 Solutions with PMC Gearless Gearless
Own Notes ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
AS
L5
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
55
- 76
5m
m
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ MO61 D4
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
• Product description
80
• Techn. specifications Rope suspension 1:1, 2:1
82
• Scope of supply
84
MO61 S
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
• Technical Data
85
• Dimensions
86
MO61 E
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
• Technical Data
87
• Dimensions
88
MO61 CRX • The solution for plastic-coated ropes
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Colouring for all Drives
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
89 100
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
78
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
79
ModKit
ModKit
MO61 D4
MO61 D4
Product Description
The powerful system solution in the modernisation of installations up to 1000 kg / 1.0 m/s (1:1) or up to 1000 kg / 1.6 m/s (2:1). Safety
Sustainability
Scope of supply
Type-approved safety brake EN 81-20/-50 compliant Integrated device for pulling out of the safety gear (optional)
Small quantities of lubricants used and no oil change required Rolling bearings, life-time lubrication
Gearless drive: Gearless PMC145-2 Machine base frame with elements for vibration isolation Additionally for 2:1: integrated rope suspension and universal diverter pulley mounting for car and counterweight Protective covers on traction sheave and diverter pulleys in acc. with EN 81-20 inclusive
Efficiency High level of efficiency of up to 92% provides for low energy consumption Ideally suited for energy recovery Comfort Minimal noises and very smooth running Outstanding ride comfort, e.g. in combination with a matched frequency inverter from LiftEquip
Innovation Well-conceived, flexible solution with integrated deflecting pulleys, rope fixing points and mountings on elevator car / counterweight Drives optimally matched to the lower to middle power segment Ideal for use in modernisation in exchange for a geared drive in the machine room, general without structural adaptations
Powerful and compact Exclusively the modern, tried-and-tested synchronous gearless drives of the PMC145-2 and PMC170 series are used in the ModKit MO61. The low-noise and low-vibration drives operate at air-borne noise levels of less than 60 dB(A). The efficiency levels extend up to 92% and are therefore particularly efficient in both driving and generator operation with energy recovery. The PMC drives are designed for 180 trips per hour with a duty cycle of 50% and can therefore easily cope with high traffic volumes.
Gearless PMC145-2
particu-larly favourable conditions for longlife design are therefore satisfied. The PMC gearless drives have a typeapproved safety brake. This eliminates the need during modernisation for additional measures, e.g. retrofits on the elevator car or a rope brake.
Gearless
Gearless
Product Description
Braking device against overspeed according to EN 81-20 /5.6.6 and against unintentional movement of the car according EN 81-20 /5.6.7.
The traction sheaves have a diameter of 240 mm with wearresistant, hardened seat grooves. Ropes with diameters of 6 mm are used. The ratio between traction sheave diameter and rope diameter is thus always 40. In accordance with the standards the
Reliability All installed components and parts are high quality Ensuring a rapid and long lasting spare parts availability
Increase your installation's energy efficiency with the ModKit MO61
IAvailable in versions for 1:1 or 2:1 rope suspension: As a rule the previous ceiling openings can be used to feed through the ropes with the machine base frame that can be individually adapted to the existing project planning. This avoids costly structural measures. High energy efficiency
Suspension 1:1
Suspension 2:1
The perfect combination: MFC and MFR frequency inverters The ModKit MO61 is rounded off if required by a compact, optimally matched MFC series frequency inverter in which all the drive parameters of the gearless drive are already stored.
Available in left- or right-hand version::
The frequency inverters from LiftEquip are specially designed for the strict re-quirements in elevator construction. The high clock frequency and control quality ensure a high degree of smooth running of the drive and low noise development.
If required, you can operate the drive with an MFR series frequency inverter with integrated energy recovery unit. When the drive is in generator operation, electrical energy is fed back to the in-house system and additionally increases the efficiency of your installation. Left-hand version
80
MFR frequency inverter, Webcode 2069from the wide product range
Right-hand version
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
81
ModKit
ModKit
Gearless
with PMC145-2 Rope suspension 1:1
MO61 D4, Technical specifications – Rope suspension 2:1 with PMC145-2
Gearless
MO61 D4 Technical specifications – Rope suspension 1:1
Rope suspension 2:1
Openings and load points in the machine room
Rope progression
(wrap angle on example with RCD =1400)
Centre of elevator car frame
Centre of counterweight
Openings and load points P in the machine room
Centre of counterweight
Rope progression
(wrap angle on example with RCD = 1250)
Centre of elevator car frame
Dimensions in mm Dimensions in mm
Performance chart (rope suspension 1:1) Nominal load max
Q
[kg]
320
450
630
Nominal speed
v
[ms]
0.6 - 1.0
0.6 - 1.0
1.6
0.6 - 1.0
Drive, gearless
PMC
145-2M
145-2L
145-2XL
145-2L
Rope suspension
r
Travel height*.
FH
[m]
Car weight min./max.
FK
[m]
Rope clearance dimension
SAM
[mm]
600 - 1400
Diameter, traction sheave
DT
[mm]
240
Suspension ropes
n x dS
[mm]
Diameter, diverter pulleys
DA
[mm]
Weight, drive
mA
[kg]
Weight, sling
mR
[kg]
1:1 33 300 - 650
25 400 - 900
8x6
650 - 900
12 x 6 240
172
216
229
216
max. 150
*approximate value
Performance chart (rope suspension 2:1) Nominal load max
Q
[kg]
630
1000
Nominal speed
v
[mm]
0.6 - 1.0
1.05 - 1.6
0.6 - 1.0
1.05 - 1.6
Drive, gearless
PMC
-
145-2M
145-2XM
145-2L
145-2XL
Rope suspension
r
Travel height*
FH
[m]
Car weight min./max.
FK
[m]
Rope clearance dimension
SAM
[mm]
750 - 1250
Diameter, traction sheave
DT
[mm]
240
Suspension ropes
n x dS
[mm]
Diameter, diverter pulleys
DA
[mm]
Weight, drive
mA
[kg]
Weight, sling
mR
[kg]
2:1 33 600 - 1200
870 - 1450
9x6
12 x 6 240
172
189
216
229
max. 150
*approximate value
82
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
83
ModKit
ModKit
MO61 D4
MO61 S
Technical Data
We supply a flexible modification set, consisting of the components
Permanent-magnet, gearless synchronous machine: Gearless PMC 145-2 Machine base frame with vibration isolation elements, in acc. with VDI 2566 - for rope suspension 1:1 - for rope suspension 2:1, integrated rope end fastening points, rope anchorages - Machine base frames are individually manufactured to the desired rope clearance dimension RCD - Both versions (1:1 and 2:1) are available in the left- or right-hand version Integrated plastic rope deflecting pulleys Variant for rope suspension 1:1: - Optional: Universal, highly flexible mounting with rope fixing points for car and counter weight Variant for rope suspension 2:1: - Universal, highly flexible mounting with diverter pulleys for car and counterweight - Complete rope kit: suspension ropes with dia. 6 mm, expert's report, conformity-tested with Directive 2014/33/EU “Lifts / Elevator Directive”, all rope accessories Optional: - Device for pulling the car out of the safety gear - Optimally matched MFC or MFR series frequency inverter
Gearless
Gearless
Scope of Supply
Option: manual release
Integrated device for pulling the car out of the safety gear (optional)
AS
L5
55
- 76
5m
m
Technical Data Type of Machine
Diverter pulley mounting for car and counterweight (suspension 2:1)
Universal diverter pulley mounting The pulley supports are fixed to the top beam of the elevator car sling and to the counterweight. The freely rotatable suspension enables the diverter pulley to be mounted to match the rope suspension so that the ropes are not subjected to twisting.
PMC145-2 M, PMC145-2 L 1:1
Suspension
r
Rated load
Q
[kg]
up to 675
Rated speed
v
[m/s]
1,0
Rope departure at drive flexible
ASL
[mm]
from 555 to 765
Diameter of traction sheave
DT
[mm]
210 / 240
Diameter of ropes
d
[mm]
6 / 6,5 *
Groove clearance
RA
[mm]
10 12
Number of ropes max. Number of grooves max.
Mounting on car sling, variable adaptation dep. on mounting profiles
z
12
Type of groove
seat / v-groove
No. of switching operations Duty cycle
Mounting on counterweight, variable adaptation dep. on frame profiles
180 ED
%
40
Version of brake
2-surface disc brake (safety brake) option: with manual release
Brake monitoring
with microswitch
Protection class Pulley diameter
IP 21 DT
[mm]
240
* 6,5 mm ropes with special diverter pulley
▶ Pre-assembled machine frame on stock ▶ Machine available from stock
84
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
85
ModKit
ModKit
MO61 S
MO61 E Gearless
Technical data
Gearless
Dimensions max.
2
y = 461 mm
1064 mm
1
Option: manual release
AS
L5
555 ≤ ASL ≤ 765 (TS 240 mm) 540 ≤ ASL ≤ 750 (TS 210 mm)
95
- 12
06
3
mm
4 Technical Data
External dimension PMC 145-2 M/L min. 800 mm
Type of Machine
PMC125 M, PMC125 L, PMC145-2 M, PMC145-2 L 1:1
Suspension
r
Rated load
Q
[kg]
up to 630
Rated speed
v
[m/s]
1,0
Rope departure at drive flexible
ASL
[mm]
from 595 to 1206
Diameter of traction sheave
DT
[mm]
210 / 240
Diameter of ropes
d
[mm]
6 / 6,5 * / 8
Groove clearance
RA
[mm]
10 / 12 12
Number of ropes max. Number of grooves max.
z
12
Type of groove Position of the rubber elements
5
seat / v-groove
No. of switching operations Duty cycle
180 ED
%
Version of brake
2-surface disc brake (safety brake) option: with manual release
Brake monitoring
with microswitch
Scope of supply machine frame: 1 2 3 4 5
86
Rope cover Console Rubber element Frame telescopable Axle, diverter pulley
40
Protection class Pulley diameter
IP 21 DT
[mm]
150 / 240
* 6,5 mm ropes with special diverter pulley
▶ Machine available from stock
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
87
ModKit
ModKit
The solution for plastic-coated ropes
56
Dimensions
MO61 CRX
56
56
395 /700
268
Compared to steel ropes with the same diameter, plastic-coated ropes have a higher friction coefficient and higher breaking strength. Thanks to the higher friction coefficient, the forces required can be transferred at a lower wrap-around angle. Due to the lower D/d ration when using this rope, it is possible to use smaller diameter traction sheaves. This means given the same drive power, greater torque is available with a smaller traction sheave diameter. An economic solution is possible with fewer ropes and a smaller drive by using plastic-coated ropes.
56
590 /895
2
EN 81-20 only describes the use of steel ropes with a nominal diameter of at least 8 mm and a D/d ratio of at least 40.
590 /895
330
395 /700
3
330
4 268
42
m
42
m
ASL
0
91 157
40
4
3
-1
42
0
ASL
50
157
2
L
91
Given the corresponding authorisation and type approval test, it is possible to deviate from this standard if the measures described in the authorisation conditions for use and the requirements demanded for operation are complied with. The trend to increasingly small traction sheaves makes it necessary to look for corresponding solutions with regard to the traction capacity.
AS
990 /1295
1
The solution here is the ModKit MO61 CRX for plasticcoated ropes It consists of the PMC 145-2 drive, with a traction sheave diameter of 150 mm for up to 11 ropes with 6 mm diameter (manufacturer Drako PTX 300) or up to 6 ropes with 8,1 mm diameter (manufacturer Brugg CTP 8.1 G2). The machine-frame is telescopic and as a result can be adjusted to the required ASL dimension. Insulation elements and rope protection according to EN 81-20 are included in delivery.
5
990 /1295
405
1
478
Gearless
56
Gearless
MO61 E
591
56
A 591
4
Type of Machine Suspension
r
Q [kg] Mass of car F [kg] Rated speed v [m/s] Rope departure at drive flexible ASL [mm] Diameter of traction sheave DT [mm] Diameter of ropes d [mm]
595 bis 900 900 bis 1206 706 bis 1011 1011 bis 1317
Number of ropes max.
fang Maschinenrahmen: bdeckung le elemente n teleskopierbar , Ableitrolle
5
5 157
A
91
Type of rope
Number of grooves max.
Groove-type
z
PMC 145-2 1:1 630 900 1,0 from 500 to 1400 150 6 8,1 7 6 DRAKO PTX 300 Brugg CTP 8.1 G2 11 6 Round groove
(Sample configuration)
ASL A
595 up to 900 706 up to1011
900 up to 1206 1011 up to 1317
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
L
405 56
5 9 1 ASL
990 /1295
88
Rubber element Frame telescopable Axle, diverter pulley
590 /895
478
A 595 bis 900 900 bis 1206 706 bis 1011 1011 bis 1317
bis 900Scope of900 supplybis machine 1206 frame: 1 Rope cover bis 1011 1011 bis 1317 2 Console 3 4 5
750
56
ASL A
Technical Data
Rated load
330
e kopierbar trolle
Konsole Gummielemente Rahmen teleskopierbar Achse, Ableitrolle
750
2 3 4 5
750
1
2
56
3
395 /700
aschinenrahmen: Lieferumfang Maschinenrahmen: g 1 Seilabdeckung
89
Compact-Gearless
ModKit
SC-Series Gearless
Gearless
MO61 CRX Technical notes on the use of plasticcoated steel ropes The requirements for the area of use, ambient conditions and state of wear are described in the particular type approval certificate for the rope. Among other things, the replacement criteria depend on a specified number of travels or duration of use. For this purpose it is necessary that the travel number (change of direction) is recorded by a manipulation-proof trip meter and that the lift is immobilised upon reaching this travel number. The ropes must be checked for wear and damage; here too the discard criteria defined in the type approval certificate must be observed. The traction sheaves and rope pulleys have a groove profile corresponding to the information of the rope supplier. Calculation of the traction capacity must be performed according to the requirements in EN 81.
SC300/400/500
The advice of the rope supplier provided on storage, transport, handling, mounting and operation of the ropes must be observed. In particular, the ropes must be secured against twisting and the special information of the rope supplier regarding diagonal pull complied with
Product description
92
Performance Matrix
93
SC300
94
SC400
95
SC500
96
Colouring for all Drives
90
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
100
91
Compact-Gearless
Compact-Gearless
The synchronous COMPACT-Gearless SC 300 is our workhorse for superior lifts. Capable of rated loads up to 1600kg with 2:1 suspension or for operating speeds up to 3.5m/s. The synchronous COMPACTGearless SC 400 is the drive for high-speed lifts and heavy loads. Capable of rated loads up to 2750 kg with 2:1 suspension or for operating speeds up to 4.0 m/s. The SC500 rounds the performance spectrum of the SC series upwards with speeds of 4.0 to 5.0 m/s at nominal loads of 630 to 1800 kg (1: 1). Excellent Motor Control The vector controlled, synchronous machines with permanent magnet excitation are known for outstanding driving comfort. They are available in several power classes ranging from 10 kW up to 24.8 kW and as standard in protection class IP 43 for SC300. The SC400 is available in several power classes
Performance Matrix
EN 81-
20/ -50
-conform
ranging from 19.4 kW up to 48.6 kW and IP20 as standard protection class. The power spectrum of the SC500 ranges from 63 kW to 104 kW with protection class IP21.
Package Solution High precision machine frames facilitate the construction of lifts with double wrap. If desired you can also obtain a frame for single wrap.
Compact Design As synchronous machine with a monobloc housing the SC-Series is very spacesaving in both the S- an the M-version.
Maintenance-Free Due to its design our COMPACT-Gearless has a small number of mechanical components. In addition, since no oil is needed, a positive effect on maintenance and product life is achieved.
Double Safety The type-tested dual-circuit disc brake ensures safety at the best. This device is certified as safety brake according to the European standard for lifts EN 81-20/-50. An additional and costly braking system for upwards braking operation is thus not necessary. Super Quiet Machine Thanks to its excellent efficiency the SC 300 can pass on an additional ventilation. This results in a comfortable low soundpressure level.
Range of synchronous gearless machines for machine room suspension m/s ft/min kg lbs 320 450 480 630 908 2000 1000 1050 1135 2500 1150 1250 1350 1362 3000 1400 1590 3500 1600 1650 1700 1800 1816 4000 1900 2000 2042 4500 2200 2250 2270 5000 2400 2500 2724 6000 2750 3000 3200 3500 3600 3632 8000 4000 4100 4500 4540 10000 4700 4800 5000
1,00 200
1,50
1,60
2:1 2,00 2,50 500
1,75 350
3,00
3,50
4,00 800
5,00 1000
SC300S 45m
80m
45m
80m
Gearless
Gearless
SC Product Description
1:1 4,00 800
3,50 700
SC400S
112m 112m
160m
Low Rise SC300M 135m 100m
120m
SC5 SC400S 160m 100m 45m
80m
80m
SC400S
160m
130m
160m 160m
160 SC400M
160m
160m
SC400M
SC500 100m 200m 80m 200m
120m 75m
on request
Travel heightTravel data can vary data depending on car weight etc. check withetc.. LEKalk 3.0 is with necessary. height can vary depending on Acar weight A check the TLD is necessary.
Low Rise
92
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
5,0 100
Mid Rise (Compact Gearless)
93
Compact-Gearless
Compact-Gearless
20/ -50
20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
-conform
3.4.2
Technische Daten - Compact gearless® SC400
Produktkatalog Compact gearless® SC400
Technische Daten - Compact gearless®
Produktkatalog Compact gearless®
SC400
EN 81-
EN 81-
Maßblatt – Maschine SC300M
3.9
Gearless
SC300
Maßblatt
SC300 auf Maschinenrahmen
Technical Data Type of machine Suspension
S003
S004
Technical Data M000
M001
M002
M005 M006
2:1
r
r
Rated Load
Q [kg]
1150
Rated Speed max
v [m/s]
3,5
Q [kg]
Rated Speed max.
v [m/s]
Diameter of Traction Sheave
DT [mm]
Diameter of Ropes
d [mm]
10
Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] d [mm] Diameter of Ropes
Number of Grooves max.
z
8
Number of Grooves max.
1000 1,6
1,75
2,0
2,5
900
1800
3,0
1,0
1600 1,6
1,75
1350 1600 2,0
410
2,5
1250 3,0
3,5
440
PN [kW]
Rated Torque
MN [Nm]
10,0
11,0
640
12
14,2
15,0
10,7
616
582
512
1175
15,3
16,7
1050
z
1)
18,2
19,5 21,6
1000
860
950
21,3
24,8
780
%
Rated Current
IN [A]
Output Factor
cos φ
23
cos φ
0,95
3Brake Mitte Treibscheibe - Schwerpunkt Monitoring
2
30
29
25
Handlüftung Bremse 0,96
24
30,5
0,94
0,95
29
2000 1800 1700 1600 1400 2750
28,5
31,4
31,2
36,5
0,96
Ventilation monitoring / Wear monitoring (microswitch)
2,0
2,5
3,0
3,5
4
2500
2000
2,5
3
560
440
440
560
13
10
10
14
14
9
9
MN [Nm] 1926 1720 1615
Duty Cycle
IN [A]
1590 1,52 1,78 2,54
Rated Torque
60
mit Option 2.Geber
M009
M010
M014
2000
1600
2:1
1000
Rated Power
Duty Cycle % Positionsbeschreibung zu Abbildung 3-2 Output Factor
S005 S003 M011 M012
2
3,5
4
5
40
46
47
13/14
seat / vee groove, hardened
Number of Switching Operations
Rated Current
S007
4,0
PN [kW]
240
1
M008 S004
1)
Abbildung 3-2: Maßblatt SC300M Switching Operations
Number of
M001
Type of Groove
seat / vee groove, hardened
Rated Power
S004 1:1
Suspension
Rated Load
Type of Groove
24
24,5
23
14,8 17,2 23,7 2135
23
26
31
32
33
29,5
34
34,5
2060 1615 1452 1444 1279 1154 2071 1899 1900 1607 1598 1609 1316 240
50 46
41
0,93
60
36,5
50
0,94
0,93
Brake Monitoring
55
36,5
50
51
50
49
0,94 91,1 91,3 90,7 91,1 91,4 0,93
54
63
0,95
54
72
74
0,96
0,96
0,95
Ventilation monitoring / Wear monitoring (microswitch)
Abbildung 3-10: Maßblatt SC400 (dargestellt mit Treibscheibe DT=560 mm / B=265 mm)
1) With current limitation to 100 A
94
M011
Type of machine
1) Optional double wrap with semicircular groove
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
Positionsbeschreibung zu Abbildung 3-10
95
External Rotor Gearless
Compact-Gearless
SC500
DAB-Series
EN 81-
20/ -50
Gearless
Gearless
-conform
Technik Abmessungen
29
2.5
Abmessungen
2.5.1
Maschine
DAB 530 Technical Data Type of machine
M001 r
Rated Load
Q [kg]
1800
Rated Speed max
v [m/s]
4,0
Diameter of Traction Sheave
DT [mm]
Diameter of Ropes
d [mm]
Number of Grooves max.
z
M002
Rated ATR_2_12_0042_0 Torque Abb. 18
M004
5,0
Technical data
99
Colouring for all Drives
3000
2500
4,0
5,0
6,0
98
M005 2:1
1600
100
560 13 8 - 10 seat / vee groove, hardened1)
Type of Groove Rated Power
M003
1:1
Suspension
Product description
PN [kW]
63
93
104
76
102
MN [Nm]
4400
5200
4850
2650
2850
Bezeichnung
240
NumberBezeichnung of Switching Operations Pos.
Pos.
Duty % aufgesteckt 1 Cycle Manuelle Bremslüftung; Hebel Rated Current IN [A] 105 3 Schwerpunkt Output Factor cos φ 0,87 Brake Monitoring Empfohlener Wartungsbereich für Drehgeber-
2
50 Luftführung der Maschinenbelüftung 163 176 110 Minimaler Wartungsbereich für Bremseinstel4 lung,0,83 manuelle Bremslüftung und Nutzung 0,85 0,95 Handrad Ventilation monitoring / Wear monitoring (microswitch)
149
5 1) Optional double wrap with semicircular groove Wechsel
96
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
97
External Rotor Gearless
External Rotor Gearless
DAB
20/ -50
-conform
General description
• Pedestal bearing AS with add-on lifting magnets, braking device and terminal box • Pedestal bearing BS • Axle screw-connected to pedestal bearing AS and BS. • Traction sheave with integrated brake disc mounted on roller bearings on axle • Rotor with vanes bolted onto both sides of the traction sheave • Stator screw-connected with axle • Protective hood for cover of rotor and vanes • The pedestal bearings are fixed via the machine base frame. In the case of separate transport without the machine base frame, a transport frame is required. The DAB external rotor gearless systems correspond to description IM B3 in accordance with EN 60034-7 and comply with the European standard. The machines are conceived for the machine room for various rope pull directions in combination with the standardised machine base frame. Deviating rope pull directions (e.g. vertically upwards or horizontally) must be technically tested The roller bearings for traction sheave mounting can be re-lubricated via lubrication nipples.
ches is part of the type approval. The machines are configured for thermal class F and are used according to class B. Thermal monitoring is by means of a PTC thermistor (130 °C ± 5 °C). For cooling the machine, there are fan wheels on both sides of the rotor for self-cooling. Brake The redundant brake (unit type: outside brake shoe) of the machine consists of two separately arranged brake circuits (brake shoes with compression springs) that directly affect the brake disc. The brake serves as the operational brake and additionally performs the function of a braking device for protection of the upwardly moving elevator car against overspeed in accordance with EN 81-20/5.6.6 and against unintended movements of the elevator car in accordance with EN 81-20/5.6.7.
Gearless
Gearless
Product Description
The DAB external rotor gearless systems consist of the following main assemblies:
DAB530
EN 81-
Traction sheave The DAB external rotor gearless systems have a traction sheave mounted on roller bearings with integrated brake disc. • Version with semi-circular grooves preferably with DW. • Version with seat and vee grooves preferably with SW. Different diameters of traction sheave are available for DAB530L/XL. Actual-value sensor The speed of the DAB external rotor gearless is picked up by a magnetic encoder with square wave pulses built into the pedestal bearing AS. For additional safety monitoring, a second pulse encoder of the type for speed monitoring is possible as an option.
The brake circuits can be manually released individually or jointly with a plug-in brake release lever. The brake circuits are released electromagnetically during operation via lifting magnets. The brake circuits are each equipped with a test switch for monitoring (brake release and brake lining wear). Moreover, each brake has an integrated overvoltage suppressor circuit (varistor). For the electric connection, a terminal box with terminal strip and cable gland are fitted on each lifting magnet.
Technical Data DAB530* DAB530L
Machine Suspension
1:1
r
2:1
Rated load
Q [kg]
2400
2250
5000
4500
4700
4100
Rated speed
v [m/s]
3,5
4,0
2,0
2,5
3,5
4,0
Diameter Traction Sheave
DT [mm]
700
max. Numbers of Grooves
z
20 x Ø 16 // 20 Ø 5/8 “ // 14 x Ø 18
Rated Power
740
seat / vee / semicircular groove
Type of Groove
The braking device with the brake test swit-
DAB530XL
PN [kW]
Rated Torque
MN [Nm]
permitted radial Axle Load
[kN]
Weight
[kg]
50,6
57,5
64,0
5040
77,3
5600
5430
88,5 4670
4083
450 4000
4300 240
Number of Operations Duty Cycle
%
Rated Current
IN [A]
103
106
60
Output Factor
cos φ
0,77
0,82
115
132
169
164
0,83
0,86
0,77
0,8
Version of Brake
external dual circuit shoe brake
Brake Monitoring
temperature monitoring
Protection Class
IP20
* Standard values
98
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
99
Drive Accessories
Colouring
Colouring for all Drives
Drive Accessories Drive Assessories
Drives
and machine frame
RAL 7021 – Black grey
RAL 7005 – Mouse grey Colour of the machine base frames
The paintwork of drives is the environmentally friendly hydro-paint in the colour RAL 7021 (Black grey). Advantages of the new hydro-paint: • Two-component water-based paint with higher impact strength • Complies with the VOC Directive (Volatile Organic Compounds) and thus very environmentally compatible • Resistant to solvents, alkaline solutions and synthetic oils
The machine base frames will continue to be supplied with a high-quality powder coating in a colour similar to RAL 7005 (Mouse grey). A polyester epoxy powder mix with a coating thickness of approx. 60 μm is used. Galvanised add-on parts are not painted. This changeover means that the drives and the optional machine base frame will consistently have a technologically superior and environmentally compatible surface coating. It will also lend the entire drive unit an even more attractive appearance.
Brake control for operational brakes • BS3
103
• BSV2 and BSV4
104
• BSV1
105
UCM-Modul incl. Shaft Encoder
100
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
102
106
101
Drive Accessories
Drive Accessories
Brake Control for Operational Brakes and NBS
BS3
The operational brakes and NBS systems of the gearless and geared drives are closed in de-energised condition. To enable the brake to be opened, the brake magnets of the two brake circuits must be energised. Depending on the brake design, the brake is opened with high-speed excitation and kept open with reduced voltage. There are also brakes that are opened without high-speed excitation. Selection of the brake control for different brakes depends on the high-speed excitation voltage and holding voltage required and the current needed. The table below shows the assignment of the drives with brakes to the different brake controls:
Overview brake control, assigned to drive. Drive unit The brake circuits are connected in series. Exceptions DAF210L with manual release.
BS 3
BSV 2
BSV 2
BSV 4
BSV 1
(50-60 Hz)
(50 Hz)
(60 Hz)
(50 Hz)
(50-60 Hz)
180/90V, 207/104V, 207/207V, 207/144V
180/90V
180/90V
207/144V
2,0-7,8A
Geared machine
6510 000 9263
65 100 27 68 0 6510 000 9262 6510 000 92 65 65 000 06 67 0
TW45C
x
x
x
TW63B
x
x
x
TW130
x
x
x
x
x
TW160
x
x
W263C
x
x
TW130 200Nm
180/90V
DAF210, manually released* DAF270 Gearless machine
DAF270, manually released*
207/207V
x
Technical Data Part number:
230 V AC
Line fuse (glass fuse on the PCB)
230V F,4AT
Braking voltages:
Maximum output current:
x
x
x
x
Ambient operating temperature: Relative air humidity:
PMC125
x
x
Max. site altitude above sea level:
PMC145-2
x
x
x
x
EMC check:
PMC170
x
x
PMC170, manually released*
x
x
Mounting: Dimensions (LxBxH) x
1,5 A 3 A (for overexcitation time, max. 2 sec.)
IP20
x
180/90V
180/90V 207/103V 207/144V overexcitation continously on 180V or 207V additional freely programmable braking voltage
Level of protection: x
DAB450/530
• • • • •
100 % ED; 60% ED with continuous overexcitation
SC500
207/144V
48-63 Hz
Switch ON duration:
SC400
PMC145-2, manually released*
6510 000 9263
Nominal system voltage:
Nominal output current:
x
x 180/90V
Operation The direct voltage required for the brake magnets is generated via a bridge rectifier and downstream pulse width modulation with output filter. A varistor protection circuit is provided at the output. An integrated power filter ensures compliance with the EMC limit values.
x
DAF270XL 2x2200Nm SC300
Design Brake control 3 consists of a control board, an integrated power filter and the connection terminals for mounting on a top hat rail.
x x
207/104V 207/104V 207/207V
Brake control 3 serves to activate brake magnets for elevator drives.
Frequency of system voltage:
W322C DAF210
Drive Assessories
Drive Assessories
In gearless and geared drives
Weight
0° - 50°C no condensation 10…95%r.H., annual mean 70 % 1000 m without derating compliance with EN 12015 and EN 12016 top hat rail 170 x 125 x 78 mm
approx. 1,00 kg
*) with optional manual release
When using the drives with the MFC 30/31-xx inverters in plug&play design or MFR, the brake control is integrated in the inverter. The different brake controls with their technical data are described below.
102
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
103
Drive Accessories
Drive Accessories
The brake control 2 and 4 is used to activate brake magnets for elevator drives with rated currents of 0.25 - 1.25 A Structure The brake control 2 and 4 consists of a control board, a power filter and the connection terminals. The components are mounted on a steel bracket and covered with a perspex sheet to prevent human contact with live parts. Operation The direct current for the brake magnets is generated via a semi-controlled bridge rectifier. The bridge rectifier is activated by a phase-control module. The bridge rectifier is equipped with a free wheeling diode as well as a varistor protection circuit at the output. An integrated power filter ensures compliance with the EMC limit values. After applying the mains voltage (230 V AC), there is an output voltage according to Table 1 at the output of terminal 10 - and terminal 20 + . Connecting connections 10 and 22 reduces the output voltage after approx. 1 second to approx. retentive voltage.
Drive Assessories
BSV1
Drive Assessories
BSV2 and BSV4 The brake control BSV1 is designed for activating brake magnets at rated currents of 2.0 A to 7.8 A. With BSV 1 the preselected current will always flow independent of line voltage fluctuations. The effective force of the brake magnets and consequently their noise response during activation can be influenced by means of the current to be set through jumpers. Configuration The brake control BSV1 consists of the power part, the control board and the filter board. All parts are mounted on a heat sink, including the terminals for the main connections. The heat sink is isolated from the remaining assemblies and is applied to protective earth potential (PE). The heat sink is also used for fastening the assembly in the control cabinet.
Mode of operation BSV1 is designed as current controller and has PI characteristic. The reference current value is generated on the control board. The desired continuous current (which normally corresponds to the holding current of the brake release magnets) is preselected by means of jumpers J1 and J2 in increments of 0.2 A in the range of 2 A to 7.8 A. Technical data Brake control 2 and brake control 4 Brake control 2 Part number
65 100 27 68 0
Technical data of BSV1 Brake control 2 60Hz 6510 000 9262
Nominal system voltage:
230VAC
Line fuse (glass fuse on the PCB)
230V F 3,15A
Brake control 4 6510 0009265
Part number Nominal system voltage: Frequency of system voltage:
Frequency of system voltage:
50Hz
60Hz
50Hz
Output voltage (retentive voltage)*
90V
90V
144V
Overexcitation voltage*
180V
180V
200V
Supply voltage for internal power supply: Output current: (Stabilized) pick-up current:
Output current
max. 2,5A
Mode of operation:
Activation period
100% ED
Activation period:
Type of protection
Max. operating frequency:
IP00
Ambient operating temperature
0° - 50°C
Type of protection:
Relative air humidity:
max. 70%
Ambient operating temperature:
max. site altitude amsl EMV check Dimensions L*B*H Weight
2000m without derating (derating above this to 3500m: derating 1% pro 100m The requirements of EN 12015 and EN 12016 are complied with 180mm*120mm*103mm
Relative air humidity: max. site altitude amsl: EMV check:
1,1 kg
Dimensions L*B*H:
65 000 06 67 0 230 V AC – 15% to 400 V AC + 10%, 2- phase or phase – N (note operating conditions of connected brake release magnets) 50 Hz bzw. 60 Hz 230V AC + 10% / - 15%, 50/60 Hz Continuous (stabilized) current is equivalent to holding current of brake: 2A to 7.8 A, to be preselected in increments of 0.2 A. Twice the value of the preselected continuous current for one second S4 75% ED 260 circuits / hour IP00 0°C to 45°C max. 70% 2000 m without derating derating of 1% per 100m above 2000 m to 3500 m compliance with requirements of EN 12015 (interference) and EN 12016 (immunity). 165 x 200 x 93 mm
* all data refer to the rated connection voltage
Weight
104
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
2,2 kg
105
UCM-Modul
UCM-Modul
Drive Assessories
Incl. Shaft Encoder
Drive Assessories
Incl. Shaf Encoder
Control
The twin encoder is mounted in the shaft. Our mounting-set consists of: • • •
An universal fixing for the guide rails Toothed belt (length depends on the travel height) for the encoder drive Diverter pulleys for the shaft pit.
The UCM-module has to be integrated in to the control. Due to the small dimensions of the module the installation is very easy and doesn´t pose any problems. For the operation with an overspeed governor an additional emergency power supply is neccessary. Therefore the governor doesn´t stop the machine in case of power breakdown unless there is no error message.
With our type-examination tested combination of UCM-module and twin shaft encoder, fulfillment of UCM very easy. This solution can be integrated very fast and easy in rope elevators and also in hydraulic elevators.
Gearless machine
Geared machine incl. NBS
Geared machine without NBS
Hydraulic
Thanks to its autonomous operation the module can be used universally with almost any controller and EN 81-20/-50 certified emergency stop facilities.
Technical data
1:1 - Stopping the machine - Activating the UCM brake device
- Bucher DSV-A3 valve stopps the flow at the piston
- Stopping the machine - Activating the UCM brake device
- Stopping the machine - activates locking device - activates safety gear
Supply voltage
24V
Power consumption
4W
Safety circuit voltage
230V
Triggering speed max.
0,2 m/s
Triggering distance max.
100 mm
Triggerung time max.
50 ms
Speed max.
3,5 m/s
Type of incremental encoder
HTL-1024 Imp./U.
Travel height
55 m (higher travel heights on request)
And that´s how it works:
2:1 - activates locking device - activates safety gear
The device monitors the movement of the car through two independent evaluation channels. The speed and traveling distance are monitored as from the start of the travel operation. As soon as the door contact is interrupted and the speed exceeds a value of 0.2 m/s, or the covered distance is greater than 100 mm, safety relays will be turned off. The redundant encoder system consists of two encoders and has a belt crack monitoring incl. safety switch.
106
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
107
Frequency Inverter
MFC and MFR Frequency Inverter
Own Notes ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
MFC 20/21, Product description
110
MFC 30/31, Product description
112
MFR 5.5, 7.5, 18, with Regeneration
114
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
108
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
109
Frequency Inverter
Frequency Inverter
MFC 20/21 Frequency Inverter
Frequency Inverter
MFC 20/21
Current vector-controlled frequency inverters from LiftEquip are designed for controlling asynchronous (MFC 20) or synchronous (MFC 21) drives.
Technical data Inverter type MFC 20/21-...
Frequency inverter package In addition to the inverter, it contains the mains filter and the power choke for connecting to TN, TT and IT power supply systems. The connection is established via the parallel or the DCP interface. The braking resistor is supplied in a separate housing.
Motor power
[kW]
15
32
48
60
105
7,5
15
22
30
45
INPUT DATA (MAINS SIDE)
Safe evacuation and maintenance In the event of failure of the power supply, a single-phase UPS (uninterruptible power supply) enables emergency operation. If, during maintenance, the controller is switched-off and the operational brake of a synchronous gearless machine is released, an optional coasting device limits the car speed to safe values by connecting an additional resistor.
Line voltage range
[V]
Nominal input current
[A]
16
27
43
52
92
Maximum input current
[A]
26
42
64
95
145
Line fuses AFF (external)*
[A]
25
40
63
80
Conductor cross section
[mm²]
2,5
6
10
16
25
3 AC 380, -10 % up to 415, +10 %
OUTPUT DATA (MOTOR SIDE)
Fast start-up The data sets of our motors are stored entirely in the device. You can thus easily and quickly select the relevant motor. Special and time-consuming motor parameterisation is thereby avoided. The motor data of third-party motors is determined through autotuning. Simple parameter entry The MFC 20/21 inverter is equipped with a control panel with a two-line LCD display. Parameters such as speed, acceleration, jerk, rated motor speed, number of encoder marks, traction sheave diameter, etc., can be entered directly in physical values.
Nominal output voltage
[V]
Nominal output current, Irated
[A]
18
32
50
60
115
Maximum output current for 10 s, Imax
[A]
30
48
75
110
180
Nominal output power
[kVA]
11
20
31
36
70
Maximum output power for 10 s
[kVA]
18,5
30
46
60
110
Conductor cross section
[mm²]
2,5
6
10
16
35
Loss at rated power
[W]
350
600
900
1200
2100
0,97
0,97
0,97
0,97
0,97
Total efficiency
3 AC 350
MECHANICAL DATA Width
[mm]
305
305
330
334
440
Height
[mm]
345
345
460
523
900
Depth
[mm]
207
207
223
295
278
Additional for connector
[mm]
+ 70
+ 70
+ 70
0
0
Minimum top / bottom clearance
[mm]
Fan power, free blowing
[m³/h]
140
140
360
360
620
Weight
[kg]
17
18
26
35
59
100 / 100
* Duty class gR
110
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
111
Frequency Inverter
Frequency Inverter
MFC 30/31 Frequency Inverter
Frequency Inverter
MFC 30/31
Plug&Play current vector-controlled frequency inverters from LiftEquip are the optimal addition for controlling asynchronous (MFC 30) or synchronous (MFC 31) drives.
Technical data Inverter type MFC 30/31-...
Ready-to-install inverter package In addition to the inverter, it contains the brake controller, the mains filter, the power choke and the travel contactors completely wired and integrated in the housing for connection to TN, TT and IT power supply systems. The connection is established via the parallel or the DCP interface. The braking resistor is supplied in a separate housing.
Motor power
[kW]
10
15
26
40
60
50R
100R
155R
310R
5
7,5
11
18,5
30
18,5
37
55
110
Input data (mains side)
EN81-A3 With integrated speed monitoring and the standard HSD circuit board, our MFC 30/31 frequency inverter, when used together with a suitable controller, is ideal for satisfying the requirements of UCM.
Line voltage range
[V]
Nominal input current
[A]
10
16
23
34
52
36
72
105
180
Maximum input current
[A]
17
26
38
55
95
85
170
315
630
Line fuses AFF (internal)
[A]
25
40
63
80
80
135
200
400
Conductor cross section
[mm²]
2,5
4
6
16
10
25
35
95
3 AC 380, -10 % up to 415, +10 %
2,5
Output data (motor side)
Safe evacuation and maintenance In the event of a power failure, emergency operation is possible via a UPS (uninterruptible power supply). If, during maintenance, the controller is switched-off and the operational brake of a synchronous gearless machine is released, an optionally available coasting device limits the car speed by connecting an additional resistor. Simple parameter entry The MFC 30/31 inverter is equipped with a control panel with a twoline LCD display. Parameters such as speed, acceleration, jerk, rated motor speed, number of encoder marks, traction sheave diameter, etc., can be entered directly in physical values.
Nominal output voltage
[V]
Nominal output current, Irated
[A]
12
18
27
42
60
35
64
104
180
Maximum output current for 10 s, Imax [A]
18
30
43
67
110
75
150
225
450
3 AC 350 - 10
3 AC 440
3 AC 450
Nominal output power
[kW]
7,2
11
16
25
36
24
48
81
140
Maximum output power for 10 s
[kVA]
11
18,5
26
40
60
51
102
187
375
Conductor cross section
[mm²]
2,5
2,5
4
10
16
6
16
35
95 / 2x35
Loss at rated power
[W]
220
330
500
800
1200
750
1500
2000
4000
0,97
0,97
0,97
0,97
0,97
0,94
0,94
0,94
0,94
344
Total efficiency Mechanical data
Additional safety Our inverter package controls the release of the operational brake via the integrated control unit. The brake monitoring switches of our drives (version SA3) for evaluating the brake condition must be connected to the controller in accordance with EN 81. The integrated travel contactors are also monitored for "switching of the contactors after change of run direction" as set out in EN 81.
Width
[mm]
244
309
309
333
401
600
1000
1400
Height
[mm]
387
715
715
1090 1263 1105
2000
2200
2200
Depth
[mm]
260
263
263
270
340
284
470
600
600
Fan power, free blowing
[m³/h]
80
140
140
360
360
360
700
1000
1000
Weight
[kg]
19
35
38
55
81
80
195
460
750
Fast start-up The data sets of our motors are stored entirely in the device. The motor data of third-party motors is determined through autotuning.
112
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
113
Frequency Inverter
Frequency Inverter
MFR 5.5, 7.5, 18
MFR 5.5, 7.5, 18
with regeneration Frequency Inverter
Frequency Inverter
with regeneration
A very compact device for inverter and regenerative mode
Technical data Inverter type MFR
The patented, energy-regenerating MFR frequency inverters from LiftEquip are the optimal addition for the energyefficient control of synchronous drives.
Motor power
7.5
18
5,5
7,5
18,5
INPUT DATA (MAINS SIDE)
Ready-to-install inverter package The MFR frequency inverters include energy recovery, electronic brake controllers, mains filter, power choke and the electronic travel contactors. Control takes place via parallel, DCP or CANopen interface. EN81-A3 Electronic travel contactors and an electronic brake controller (within the standard scope of supply) enable a uniquely fast shutdown time of the drive. With our integrated speed monitoring and a suitable controller, you have the safest and fastest solution for satisfying UCM requirements.
Line voltage range
[V]
3 AC 380, -10 % up to 460, +15 %
Line frequency
[Hz]
nominal 50, range 48 ... 63
Continuous input current (thermal)
[A]
10
14
36
Maximum input current
[A]
20
30
75
OUTPUT DATA (MOTOR SIDE) Nominal output voltage
[V]
Nominal output current, Irated [A] Maximum output current for 3 s, Imax [A]
Energy-saving function In addition to energy recovery, our MFR inverters also offer the possibility to further save energy in standby mode (approx. 17 watt).
3 AC 0…input voltage (max. 340 V for motor design) 12
18
42
21,8
33,5
75
Conductor cross section
[mm²]
2,5
2,5
10
Loss at rated power
[W]
350
500
1200
0,95
0,95
0,95
Total efficiency Type of protection
IP21
MECHANICAL DATA
Simple parameter entry The MFC inverter is equipped with a control panel with a two-line LCD display. Parameters such as speed, acceleration, jerk, rated motor speed, number of encoder marks, traction sheave diameter, etc., can be entered directly in physical values. Remote parameterisation via DCP and CANopen is possible. Additional safety Our inverter package controls the release of the operational brake via the integrated control unit. The brake monitoring switches of our drives, for evaluating the brake condition, can be connected to the inverter in accordance with EN 81. Fast start-up The data sets of our motors are stored entirely in the device. Third-party motors can be matched to the inverter by entering the motor data.
[kW]
5.5
Width
[mm]
330
330
353
Height
[mm]
614,5
614,5
971,8
Depth
[mm]
196
196
207,5
Minimum top / bottom clearance
[mm]
Fan power, free blowing
[m³/h]
140
140
300
Weight
[kg]
18,4
18,4
43,5
0/100
100/100
Radio interference (emission) according to EN12015 Immunity to EN12016 Power dissipation in standby mode max. 17 W PlugPlay device (complete inverter with regeneration)
Interfaces • CANopen - Position Mode - Velocity Mode • DCP - 03 - 04 • Parallel The motor parameters can be programmed on request.
114
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
115
Frequency Inverter
Frequency Inverter
Technical Report
Technical Report
Energy efficiency by energy recovery
Visualization of system data – Energy efficiency by energy recovery Jörg Hellmich , Volker Lenzner 1)
UK
2)
Using the CANopen-Lift standard, system data from the control system and components are available on the bus in real time. With the flexiPage system of Elfin the data are edited and visualized in a flexible manner. On the occasion of the interlift 2015 the LiftEquip company presented the energy recovery topic by way of the energy data example. In the past the elevator energy efficiency topic has already been discussed on numerous occasions also in connection with the energy recovery and several papers have been presented on different conferences. Since the energy saving ordinance (EnEV) fails to name the elevator, no concrete measures are defined which need to be taken and met. But even without these specific EnEv requirements there have been various approaches in the past to reduce the energy demand of elevator systems. The directive VDI 4707 in parts 1 and 2 first of all considered on a national level the energy topic for elevators and elevator components which was later also described on an international scale in the ISO 25 745-1 standard which is largely based on the principles of the VDI directive. For the operation of the elevator this paper takes a look at the ‚riding’ and ’standby’ operating conditions and uses defined utilization categories to take into account the rides needed to determine the overall efficiency of the system. In the ’riding’ operating mode the converter is the component which by using the energy recovery instrument can make a major contribution to the elevator’s energy efficiency. In the past energy recovery systems have been used primarily in high-frequency systems and plants with high frequency converter outputs to reduce the generation of heat of the regeneration resistors which is critical in many applications and which sometimes can
only be controlled using additional airconditioning systems in the machine room. In standard applications and in elevator systems that are not very frequented, an energy recovery system has often been excluded since most of the energy (70 to 80 %) of these systems is needed during standby. It made more sense for these particular elevator systems only to take measures which reduce the standby consumption. Many frequency converter systems that are available on the market and allow energy to be recovered consist of two separate components; the actual frequency converter and the separate energy recovery unit. In this constellation the extra costs must be identified and the standby energy demand of the energy recovery unit must be examined. Often the investment for systems with a low performance and utilization is economically unwise. With the converter of the MFR series LiftEquip offers a system with an integrated energy recovery unit which recovers energy from the first ride onward at no extra cost and as such contributes to the economic efficiency of the elevator system. In discussions held with planners, operators and elevator manufacturers the following questions frequently crop up:
How much energy is recovered? When is energy recovery worthwhile? What does the energy recovery cost?
Passenger elevator Rated Load
1.000 kg
Passenger
13
Rated Speed
1.6 m/s
Travel height
13.93 m
Landing
4
Suspension
2:1
Location drive
down/beside
What happens to the recovered energy?
Drive
LiftEquip PMC 170L007
It is obvious from explanations earlier in this paper that there is no collective answer to these questions since a lot of individual parameters need to be taken into account.
Diameter of traction sheave
400 mm
Ropes
5 x 8 mm (Drako 250 T)
Frequency inverter
LiftEquip MFR 18
Control system
Böhnke&Partner bp308 CANopen
Car light
LED
Prior the interlift exhibition, LiftEquip, Böhnke + Partner and Elfin jointly thought about ways to visualise the ”energy recovery” topic in a simple and informative manner. For this purpose an elevator in one of LiftEquip’s buildings was modified. In the elevator with CANopen-Lift capabilities a converter of the MFR series is controlled by a bp308 control system. The following table shows the system parameters of the system used. For measuring the energy demand the elevator was equipped with an energy measuring system of Janitza and the measured data were made available on the CANopen bus. Using the Elfin flexyPage system the measured data were read from the bus and transferred together with the current position values, the ride counter and the live picture of a video camera via a safe VPN connection to the exhibition stand where they were visualized on a big screen. With
Motor
Energy measurement Janitza Screen
Brake resistor with regenerator
DC link
Apart from the system parameters and the system’s position, the screen also displayed the system’s calls, the current floor position and the ride direction. A new pointer instrument was developed for displaying the performance
18
116
which indicates whether the elevator is drawing energy from the power system or is working in a regenerative mode and supplies energy back into the power system. In conjunction with the two measured data of the total energy drawn from and supplied back to power system and the direct display of the energy costs saved, the observer got an idea of the efficiency of the energy recovery system. In order to be able to display the mode of operation of the energy recovery system in connection with the load condition, it is planned to equip the elevator with new load measuring sensors which can make available the current load on the CAN bus.
Converter on the motor end
Household 1
Household 2
Converter 400 V / 50 Hz /3p
General supply meter
or
Energy recovery unit
Lighting 200 W
1) Elfin 2) LiftEquip
Fig. 3: Presentation of the current system data and measurements
Since elevators are not subject to the Renewable Energy Act a refund for energy not consumed in the building and
DC link
Regenerator with brake resistor not applicable
During the four days of the interlift 2015 exhibition a total of 1982 rides were made with the elevator, 27.5 kWh being drawn from the power supply for the traction operation and 8.1 kWh being produced in the regenerative mode and supplied back to the building’s power supply network. With a charge of 0.29 € per kWh this corresponds to savings of 2.35 € for the four days and annual savings of 214.40 €.
Since the MFR converter of LiftEquip is offered at no extra cost compared to the MFC converter with the same performance, every kilowatt hour supplied back to the power system is a direct saving.
Motor
Converter on the input end
Converter on the motor end
Elfin flexyPage
the aid of this system the exhibition visitors could enter car calls and directly follow the ride movements of the elevator and the flow of energy caused by the operation.
400V/50Hz
Input rectifier
supplied back to the power supply network is not possible. But since every building has a regular basic energy demand, the energy as a rule is consumed in the building. So energy is available to the building which does not have to be procured from an external source.
Table: System data of the measured elevator system
42. Jahrg. (2016)
Heft 1
Issue 09/2017
Elevator 300 W
Fig. 4: Energy drawn from the power supply in the building
Fig. 1: Converter operation with and without energy recovery
LIFT-REPORT
Heating 200 W
20
www.liftequip.com
Energy recovery not only results in a better energy classification of the elevator system but also directly yields an economic benefit. Depending on the degree of utilization elevators provide different savings which may sometimes prove to be quite small. But in view of the total number of elevators (in Germany approx. 700,000 systems) the saving potential cannot be ignored. Whenever this is economically possible, one should therefore always include the energy recovery option when installing new elevator systems. And even when systems are only modernized and the drive system is replaced, energy recovery is an option to contribute to a reduction of the CO2 level and to the protection of the overall environment.
Technical Report - Energy efficiency by energy recovery
Technical Report - Energy efficiency by energy recovery
Energy efficiency by energy recovery
Summary The publication of VDI 4707 turned the spotlight on the energy demand of elevators. The project described in this paper clearly shows how intelligent energy recovery applications allow energy to be saved from the first ride onward. Other savings are achieved by networking the components via the open standard CANopen-Lift allowing energetically optimized ride curves and a distinct reduction of the energy demand in standby mode. CANopenLift is also the basis for the measurement, visualization and transmission of energy values with the flexyPage system. In conjunction with other sensor data, the networking option provides additional possibilities for an energetic optimization of components and systems in special operating conditions.
LIFT-REPORT
42. Jahrg. (2016)
Heft 1
117
Car Sling
Car Sling FleCS Car Sling
Own Notes ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ FleCS F2/F4
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Product Description
120
Technical Data
121
Dimensions
123
Performance data/technical description
124
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Version
125
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Variants
126
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
118
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
119
Car Sling
Car Sling
FleCS F2/F4
FleCS F2/F4
The car frame FleCS is designed for pas-senger and cargo lifts with nominal loads up to 4000 kg. It is also suitable for new lifts and modernisation. • For sheet metal, glass and panorama cars • For standard & high performance lifts • According to new EN 81-20/-50
Technical data
FleCS F2
sible under cramped conditions, since elements bolted together. Innovation Well-conceived design with integrated attachment options for a multitude of attachments: Rope anchorage, traction sheaves, load measurement, balance rope, car buffer, guide rails, lift cable, etc.
Version presented for suspension 2:1 with two rope pulleys, without rope pulley insulation, with sliding guides (left side) and roller guides (right side), without braking system in upward direction.
Car Sling
Car Sling
Product Description
Scope of delivery Safety • Scope of delivery of car frame can be Construction calculated, optimised and adjusted to project-specific requiredemonstrably safe in design according to ments. the finite-elements-method (FEM). • Wide range of options and special versions available, with prepared Comfort structure. • Vibration-insulated bearing of the car through helical compres-sion springs Interfaces • Smooth-running polyamide pulley The series of the car frame FleCS is sheaves, cast rope pulleys optional suitable for the installation of own cars, • Roller guides optional because the inferfaces to the car are Flexibility defined. Installation of the car frame also pos-
Main performance data Car frame
FleCS F2
FleCS F4
Nominal load Q max.
2600 kg
4000 kg
Speed v
≤ 4,0 m/s
≤ 2,5 m/s
Car width CW
900-2200 mm
1270-3000 mm
Car height CH
2000-2700 mm
2000-3000 mm
Car attachment height FBEH
CH + FBOH + 56,5 mm
For rope suspension
1:1 / 2:1
1:1 / 2:1 / 3:1 / 4:1
Lubricator-/roller guides
l/¡
l/¡
2:1
Version presented for suspension 2:1 with a rope pulley, without rope pulley insulation, with sliding guides (left side) and roller guides (right side)
1:1
Version presented for suspension 1:1, with sliding guides (left side) and roller guides (right side)
CH + FBOH + 62 mm 1 CH + FBOH + 631 mm 2
Progressive safety gear (downl wards)
l
¡
¡
Braking system (upwards)
Other versions
l Standard, ¡ Option, 1 Car P3000/P4000, 2 Car P2000 MR1, FBOH – car floor height
120
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
121
Car Sling
Car Sling
FleCS F2/F4
FleCS F2/F4 Dimensions
FleCS F4
Car frame
FleCS F2
FleCS F4 1270-3000
Car width
KB
[mm]
900-2200
Car depth
KT
[mm]
1000-3050
Car height
KH
[mm]
2000-2700
2000-3000
KB + 50/60
KB + 60…210 (in 1 mm steps)
min. 1250 (P2000 MR1, P3000)/ min. 1600 (P4000), max. 3500
Car inside micrometre
FKSTM [mm]
Clear width
LB
[mm]
FKSTM – 26/36 (depending on sheet metal thickness)
FKSTM – 38
Rope pulley diameter
DSR
[mm]
Ø 320
for ropes (number x diameter)
n x dr
[mm]
8x8
Groove distance
Ra
[mm]
14
Axis distance rope pulley min.
RA
[mm]
max.
Car Sling
Car Sling
Technical data
¡: KB + 40…210 (in 1 mm steps) Ø 400
Ø 540
Ø 400
Ø 540
10x6
8x10
7x13
8x10
7x13
11
18
20,5
18
20,5
Ø 320
Ø 400
Ø 540
Ø 400
Ø 540
394…580
474
614…750
420
560…896
FKSTM-(480…510)
FKSTM-(670…750) FKSTM-(810…1150)
FKSTM-(760…870)
FKSTM-(880…1134)
Car height
FBOH
[mm]
100 (P1000), 110/124/174 (P4000)
Car attachment height
FBEH
[mm]
KH + FBOH incl. flooring + 56,5
Distance damper attachment top
a
[mm]
KB - 70
Distance insulation bar bottom
b
[mm]
KB – 70, KB – 50 (in brake)
124/174 (P2000 MR1, P3000), 110/124/174 (P4000) KH + FBOH incl. flooring + 62 (P3000/P4000) + 631 (P2000 MR1) KB – 70 (P3000/P4000), KB – 90 (P2000 MR1) KB – 60 (distance ultra-bushes on strut attachment), KB – 180/520 (P2000 MR1), KB – 270/610 (P3000), KB – 320 (P4000) with 2 buffer plates:
Distance of buffer plates
PA
[mm]
2 buffer plates: FKSTM – 430 / FKSTM – 550 (in WRG150)
FKSTM – 1050/870 (without/with balance ropes) with4 buffer plates: in addition FKSTM – 140/1050 (without/with balance ropes)
Version presented with two rope pulleys, without rope pulley insulation, with sliding guides (left side) and roller guides (right side), without braking system in the upward direction; side view with brace mounting (left) and without brace mounting (right)
Other versions
Distance between guide rails
[mm]
f
[mm]
66/266
45/222
Height lower beam
HU
[mm]
184…265
326/384,5 (without/with brake)
Height insulation bar
h
[mm]
ca. 60 Ø 400:
Ø 540:
Ø 400:
Ø 540:
83/93…102
118/104
175,5/295,5
72 (2 SR) / 78 (1 SR)
140/72,5
with flat upper beam (FLOH)
99
–
–
–
–
Height upper beam
Ø 320:
Ø 400:
Ø 540:
HOS
[mm]
206(2SR)/240(1SR)
216(2SR)/240(1SR) 240
300/350/400
206(2SR)/240(1SR)
240
240
300/350/400
with flat upper beam (FLOH)
165
–
–
–
distance lower edge upper beam to cover rope pulley
Ø 320:
Ø 400:
Ø 540:
Ø 400:
Ø 540:
48
83/73
145,5
0
67,5/187
71
–
–
–
without rope pulley insulation with rope pulley insulation
OH
HUS
[mm]
[mm]
with flat upper beam (FLOH) Distance lower edge upper beam to car ceiling height HO
[mm]
with flat upper beam (FLOH)
Version presented for supspension 1:1, with sliding guides (left side) and roller guides (right side)
– (no insulation track)
Ø 320:
without/with roep pulley insulation
1:1
FKSTM – 290 (in L180) / FKSTM – 430 (in RT18) / FKSTM – 400 (in WRG200) / FKSTM – 334 (in WRG150)
Distance upper edge upper beam to cover rope pulley
Version presented for suspension 2:1 with a rope pulley, without rope pulley insulation, with sliding guides (left side) and roller guides (right side)
FKSTM – 250 / FKSTM – 334 (in WRG150)
Height support guide rails bottom (without/with braking system)
without/with rope pulley insulation
2:1
e
Height damper
i
[mm]
– Ø 540: 217 (without
Ø 320:
Ø 400:
Ø 540:
Ø 400: 62 (P3000/P4000)/
100
100
220
631 (P2000 MR1)
267 (1:1, with RP-insul.)
98
–
–
–
–
115 (0 with FLOH)
Distance floor attachment bottom
q
[mm]
715
Width side beam
o
[mm]
309
Distance damper attachment top
r
[mm]
Ø 320: 393
RP-insul.)/
40
(OH) Upper beam
–
(without strut attachment)
395 Ø 400: 413
Ø 540: 413
460
l Standard, ¡ Option, – unavailable
122
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
123
Car Sling
Car Sling
FleCS F2/F4
FleCS F2/F4
Car frame
Versions
FleCS F2
FleCS F4
Nominal load max.
Q
[kg]
2600
4000
Nominal speed
v
[m/s]
≤ 4,0
≤ 2,5
Mass braked max.
mges
[kg]
4615
8490
Car width
KB
[mm]
900-2200
1270-3000
KT
[mm]
Car depth Car height
KH
[mm]
Type
Car Car inside micrometre
2000-2700 P1000 (Q≤1000 kg), P4000 (Q≤4000 kg)
2000-3000 P2000 MR1 (Q≤2000 kg), P3000 (Q≤3000 kg),
l
l
2:1 (with 1/2 rope pulley)
¡/¡
¡/¡
3:1 (with 2 rope pulley)
–
¡
4:1 (with 2 rope pulley)
–
¡
Car insulation bottom
l
l
Car attachment top (present/insulated)
l/l
l/¡
Rope pulley insulation
¡
¡
Rope pulley insulation (for F2/F4) Rope pulley in the upper beam can be designed with rope pulley insulation. Two versions are available: • Pulley shaft bearing-supported with ultra-bushes in the upper beam • Pulley supports bearing-supported with spring elements in the upper beam
189-436
387-693
Progressive safety gear in downward direction
Type
l (6071/0, …/1, …/2)
l (6071/0, …/1, …/2, …/3)2)
Braking system in upward direction
Type
¡ (6071/0, …/1, …/2)
¡ (6071/1, …/2)
Governor pick-up (distance from centre guide rails)
[kg]
[mm]
200/250
200/250/300/350/400
Sliding guides
Type
L127 / L217 / ETN FK4
L180
roller guides
Type
Rope pulley insulation: ultra-bushes (left), spring elements (right)
RTK100 / WRG150
RT18 / WRG150 / WRG200-FK
Attachment for chain guides
¡
¡
Attachment for balance ropes
¡ (in v>2,5 m/s)
–
l Standard, ¡ Option, – unavailable. 1) Car frame weight without grippers, guide rails, chain guides and rope pulley. You can receive an exact value on request taking the lift configuration into account.. 2) No braking system is technically possible with safety gear / 3.
Technical description • Car frame consisting of multiply canted sheet metal profiles, screwed elements • Surfaces • Galvanised elements (upper-/lower beam, side beams) are not painted • other parts with powder coating, Colour similar to RAL 7005 (mouse grey), Polyester epoxide mixed powder with layer thickness approx. 60 µm • side beams in the centre screwed together
• Overload measuring equipment accordding to EN 81-20 ing to EN 81-20, Triggered at nominal load • Guide rails at top integrated in frame + 10 % • Lift cable attachment • Compensation-/balance chain attachment Options • Balance rope attachment (for v > 2.5 m/s) • Pulley sheaves for suspension 2:1, atta- • Maintenance lock according to EN 81-20 ched to upper beam • Without car insulation for cargo cars • Governor pick-up extended to 250/300/350/400 mm, required for roller guides • Safety switch in explosion-protected design • Rope pulley insulation in upper beam with Scope of delivery • Complete frame with screw connections elastomer springs and attachments • Braking system in upward direction accor-
124
Integrated guidel rail: sliding guide (left), roller guide (right)
P4000 (Q≤4000 kg)
Rope suspension 1:1 (without rope pulley )
(1)
Integrated guide rail (for F2) The integrated guide rail attachment on the upper beam is available for the car frame FleCS F2, in combination with the rope pulley diameter Ø 320 mm, for the sliding guides L127/ L217 and roller guide RTK100. Depending on the lift configuration, a smaller shaft head can be realised with this option.
min. 1600 (P4000), max. 3500
1270-3210
mFR
[mm]
min. 1250 (P2000 MR1, P3000)/
950-2250
Car frame weight
FKSTM
1000-3050
Car Sling
Car Sling
Performance data / technical description
Issue 09/2017
Car insulation (for F2/F4) FleCS car frames are delivered as standard with car insulation. Helical compression springs and dampers ensure elastic mounting of the car in the frame. The type, number and arrangement of the springs (at the bottom, on the car floor) and dampers (at the top, for the car ceiling) vary depending on the nominal load and car weight. Car insulation
Braking system (for F2/F4) FleCS car frames are delivered as standard with a progressive safety gear integrated in the car frame for the downward direction. A braking system for the downward direction is optionally available. Synchronisation between the left and right side is ensured via a sophisticated bar linkage for both systems. The systems are monitored in each case by two independent switches. The safety catch, braking system and synchronisation bar linkage are integrated in the lower beam. Lower beam with braking system
www.liftequip.com
125
Car Sling
Counterweight
FleCS F2/F4
GTK 700/1050/1370
with braking system
with integrated guide on top
Pulley guide
with braking system
with integrated guide on top
with 1 rope pulley, insulated
with 1 rope pulley
without rope pulley
Sliding guide
The variable solution for many installation situations
Counterweight
Car Sling
Variants
GTK 700/1050/1370 128
• Special Versions
129
with 2 rope pulleys, insulated
with 2 rope pulleys
• Product description
126
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
127
Counterweight
Counterweight
GTK 700/1050/1370
GTK 700/1050/1370
Special Versions
For a counterweight mass of up to 6460 kg in various versions The counterweight frames calculated for an overall mass up to 6240 kg (special fillers). The various necessary widths, gauges between rails and suspensions (1:1 and 2:1) are available in the modular system:
High Safety
Drawing for 2:1
Quick and Easy Assembly Governor rope anchorange, top beam
Variable Filling
Optimum adjustment to your installation With the variations in length, width and gauge between rails, the counterweight is an optimum fit for the most diverse project planning dimensions. In the standard versions, the counterweight frames with rope attachment for 1:1 arrangement or rope pulleys are available for 2:1 arrangement. Besides the standard gauge between rails of 700, 1050 and 1370 mm, other clearance dimensions can be produced as well.
Colour The products shown are available in mousegrey - RAL 7005 - as standard and with zinc coated parts. Great Stability
The variable gauges are: • GTK 700/135: 612 ≤ gauge ≤ 700 mm • GTK 1050/135/200: 701 ≤ gauge ≤ 1050 mm • GTK 1370/270: 1051 ≤ gauge ≤ 1370 mm • Special Versions • Roller guides • Rope pulleys for 2:1 suspension fixed in a pulley carrier on the top beam • Progressive safety gears (type 0, 1 and 2) • Buffer plates additionally • Panelling of counterweight on one or on both sides • Compensation chain or compensation rope mounting
Optimal Adjustment to Your Lift
Counterweight frames GTK
Additional options Various special versions such as sliding and pulley guides, and a safety gear on the counterweight can be selected. For aesthetic purposes, the counterweight can be encased in a glass shaft. Diverse accessories for the mounting of compensation chains and compensating ropes are selectable. The path cover in the pit area in compliance with
EN81-1, adjusted to the mass of the counterweight, is available in the program. Variable filling The two lengths for a multilayer filling with max. 30 or 40 levels (a layer is 60 mm) and various filler materials such as Gussolith, steel and lead allow variable adjustment to the dimensions of
Counterweight (CW) GTK - Data table 2:1 GTK 700 GTK 1050 GTK 1050 GTK 1370
Width of CW [mm] 135 135 200 270
Counterweight Mass The following approximated values do include the masses of the counterweight frame, the hitch plate or the rope pulley, one or two buffer plates and the sliding guides: GTK 700/135: 159 kg, 1:1 suspension; 187 kg, 2:1 suspension; GTK 1050/135: 184 kg, 1:1 suspension; 211 kg, 2:1 suspension; GTK 1050/200: 210 kg, 1:1 suspension; 287 kg, 2:1 suspension; GTK 1370/270: 374 kg, 1:1 suspension; 422 kg, 2:1 suspension.
Counterweight
Counterweight
Product Description
Total Mass [kg]1 ≤ 1650 ≤ 2435 ≤ 3630 ≤ 6240
Pulleys [mm] 360 360 450 / 540 540
the shaft. High level of safety The frame construction of angular sheet metal profiles in the top and bottom beams and reinforced knot junctions and their connections were calculated and optimised with the Finite Element Method (FEM), whereby the necessary proofs of solidity were also provided. Filler materials • Steel • Gussolith • Concrete • Lead
Total Mass (filler+frame)
1
128
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
129
Safety Gears
Progressive safety/Braking system Safety Gears
Own Notes ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
6071
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Product description
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
132
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
130
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
131
Safety Gears
Safety Gears
20/ -50
Product Description
Product Description
-conform
Betriebsanleitung Bremsfangvorrichtung/Bremseinrichtung 6071
The safety device can be deployed as a progressive safety gear or braking device. They are 2 identical components but turned in their installation position by 180°, and depending on how they are deployed they have a set braking or gripping force. In everyday language, the safety device is also referred to as a jaw.
4.1
Item Designation
Item Designation
1 Jaw body
2 Seal wire
3 Seal
4 Threaded bolts
5 Counter wedge
6 Fork element
7 Guide plate
8 Stop bolt
9 Guide bracket
Abmessungen Maßtabelle Fangzange Rechtsausführung
Linksausführung
10 Flat countersunk nib bolt
11 Safety gear roller
12 Limit stop
13 Grip wedge
14 Compression spring
15 Spacer sleeve
16 Split pin
17 Slotted nut
18 Spring plate
19 Mounting borehole 20 Name plate
Abb. 4.1-1
with rated load at the guide rails and to hold it there (this also applies in the event of failure of the suspension gear). The regulations of EN 81-20/-50 are to be adhered to.
• Operating mode (dry, oiled)
Distinction by deployment according to the application Safety device / progressive safety gear (AFV) for safety gear operation downwards. Safety device with function as bra- Progressive safety gears are type king system (ABV) approved safety devices with type On the elevator car, a safety braking approval marking and CE marking device is prescribed that takes effect in accordance with EN 81-1:98. in the upward direction as a protecThe progressive safety gear on the tion device against overspeed for elevator car may only take effect in the elevator car moving upwards. On a downward direction and must be reaching the tripping speed on the able to brake the loaded elevator car speed governor, this must be able to from the tripping speed of the speed governor and hold it in place. brake the empty elevator car at the guide rails. The regulations of EN 81-20/-50 are In country-specific certifications you Safety device with function as pro- to be adhered to. hesitate to contact us.. gressive safety gear (AFV) On the elevator car and when reDistinction by construction size quired on the counterweight, a safety In ascending order according to braking system is prescribed that power output (0, 1, 2, 3), corretakes effect in the downward direction sponding to the characteristics: as a safety device against the risk • Mass of car and load of falling. On reaching the tripping • Speed speed on the speed governor, this • Guide rail dimension and surface must be able to brake the elevator car (drawn, machined)
132
Technik
4
Issue 09/2017
2 g
h
1 Item Designation
f
Functional description In the event of overspeed, the safety gear rope connected with the grip wedge on the safety gear frame is blocked. The grip wedge is held in place while the elevator car continues to move. A transport roller in the grip wedge draws the grip wedge in the direction opposing the moving direction of the elevator car on a chamfer on the jaw body between the rail and jaw body. In doing so, it expands the spring range of the jaw body. The jamming effect of the jaw body is configured in such a way that the frictional forces between the grip wedge, counter wedge and rail decelerate the elevator car to a standstill. The jaw is released by moving the elevator car in the opposite direction. Here, the jaw body slips back over the chamfer on the counter wedge until the counter wedge is pressed by the return spring into its initial situation and thus releases the rail.
Technik
1 Rail blade thickness 2 Guide blade width
e
Safety Gears
6071
EN 81-
Safety Gears
6071
k
i
m
l
n Pos.
1
Bezeichnung Type a Schienenkopfdicke 0, 1 50
Abb. 4.1-2
Typ 0, 1 2 3
a 50 50 60
2 3c
b 64 64 82
31 31 40
50 d 60 e 106 ~ 70 106 ~ 70 132 ~ 85
b 64 64 82f 81 94 138
c Pos. dBezeichnung e f Schienenkopfbreite 31 2 106 ~ 70 81 31 106 70 94 g40 h 132 i k85 l 138 m 15 15 20
179 179 216
13 13 16,5
Ø 22 Ø 22 Ø 28
4 4 11,5
170 170 195
g 15 15 20 n
h 179 179 216
i 13 13 16,5
k Ø 22 22 28
l 4 4 11,5
m 170 170 195
n 192 192 233
192 192 233
BFV_6071_14_de
Assignment of the safety devices to the rail blade thickness
Tab. 4.1-1
Type 6071/ ThyssenKrupp Aufzugswerke
Part number Braking System
Rail blade thickness [mm] 22
Version 09/2014 Safety gear
0
9 - 16
60 710 59 03 0
60 710 63 03 0
1
9 - 16
60 710 60 03 0
60 710 64 03 0
2
9 - 19
60 710 61 03 0
60 710 65 03 0
3
16 - 35
60 710 62 03 0
60 710 66 03 0
www.liftequip.com
133
Overspeed Governor
GBTK 6023, 6023F, 6024 and Accessories Overspeed Governor
Own Notes ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
GBTK 6023
136
GBTK 6023 F
138
GBTK 6024 300S
139
Governor tensioning weight D200/D300
140
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
134
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
135
Overspeed Governor
Overspeed Governor
EN 81-
20/ -50
Overspeed Governor
-conform
GBTK 6023 in EN 81-20/-50
EN 81-
20/ -50
-conform
Overspeed Governor
GBTK 6023 Technical data Pulley diameter D
mm
300
250*
Rated speed vrated
m/s
2.5
2.0
Tripping speed vT
m/s
0.6 - 3.13
0.5 - 2.6
Inductive sensor for monitoring the plunger position
Magnet 12V 100 % duty cycle
*with test groove diameter 170 mm Rocker Blocking device - Blockable rocker without voltage
Safety contact - optional
Standard version as shown side on Options: - Remote tripping (blockable rocker with voltage) - Blocking device (blockable rocker without voltage) - Bracket with final limit switch OFF - Many other functions on request
Safety contact with preswitching and electrical reset - optional
vN ≤ 2,5 m/s
vN ≤ 2,5 m/s FHmax= 175 m Use as a tripping element as part of the protection device against unintended movements of the elevator car in acc. with EN 81‑20.
1
2
3
Technical data Pulley diameter D
mm
300
Rated speed vrated
m/s
≤ 2.5
Tripping speed vT
m/s
0.6 - 3.13
Max. engaging time of magnet
ms
39
Max. total travel
mm
310
4
Version by EN 81-20/-50
EX
GBTK 6023 in EN 81-20/-50 compliant and EX version
Explosion proved
11 10 5 6 9
7
vN= 1,0 m/s
8
Technical data
136
1
Cam disc
7
Lever with rubber ring and locking plate
2
Governor pulley
8
Locking position switch
3
Captive-type adjusting screw
9
Limit stop
4
Cast-on lug
10
Latch on rocker
5
Cap spring
11
Non-locking position switch
6
Pulley with rubber ring on rocker
Use as a tripping element as part of the protection device against unintended movements of the elevator car in acc. with EN 81‑20. The EX evaluation of this component is conducted within the framework of the overall EX evaluation of the installation.
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
Pulley diameter D
mm
300
Rated speed vrated
m/s
1.0
Tripping speed vT
m/s
1.2 - 1.3
Max. engaging time of magnet
ms
39
Max. total travel
mm
310
137
Overspeed Governor
Overspeed Governor
EN 81-
20/ -50
20/ -50
Overspeed Governor
-conform
Standard version with electrical remote reset - Hardened groove (wear-resistant) - Finish-wired and tested - Connections to system plug connector - Specially developed for MRL installations Options: - Remote tripping (blockable rocker with voltage) - Blocking device (blockable rocker without voltage) - Many other functions on request
GBTK 6024 300S
EN 81-
-conform
Overspeed Governor
GBTK 6023 F
vN = 2,00 - 4,00 m/s
300S: 379 mm
Technical data Pulley diameter D
mm
200
Rope diameter d
mm
6.5
Rated speed vrated
m/s
≤ 1.6
Tripping speed vT
m/s
0.7 - 2.09
300
S: 4
88 m
m
View with encoder mounting, left-hand version
300S: 102 mm
GBTK 6023 in EN 81-20/-50 compliant version - Left- / right-hand version available - Encoder mounting optional
Technical data 300S
Type
Inductive sensor for monitoring the plunger position
Magnet 12V 100 % duty cycle
Pulley diameter D with 8 mm Drako 300T
mm
304
Axle load FA max
N
Rated speed vrated
m/s
2,0 - 8,0
Tripping speed vT
m/s
2,35 - 10,5
Braking force FB
N
400 - 2100
12.000
Blocking device Blockable rocker without voltage Rocker
11
Safety contact - optional
12 10 Safety switch with preswitching and electrical reset
Use as a tripping element as part of the protection device against unintended movements of the elevator car in acc. with EN 81‑20.
Max. total travel
Cover for encoder
7
Rope slip-off guard
2
Shaft cover
8
Cam, downwards
3
Connection for encoder
9
Tripping wheel for rope brake
4
Type plate
10
Tripping wheel for pre-switching
5
Electr. connection
11
Cover plate
6
Cam, upwards
12
Governor pulley
9
Bracket with integrated final limit switch OFF
1 2 3
8 7 6
4
Max. engaging time of magnet
1
40 ms 205 mm
Technical details as for above version 5
138
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
139
Overspeed Governor
Overspeed Governor
Governor tensioning weight D200
Governor tensioning weight D300
Accessories
Technical data
Technical data
Tension force
500 N
Tension force
648 N / 870 N
Governor rope diameter
6.5 mm
Governor rope diameter
6.5 mm / 8.0 mm
Governor tensioning pulley
D=200/ 6.5-PA
Governor tensioning pulley
D=300: 6.5-PA / 8.0-PA
Rated speed vrated
≤ 1.6 m/s
Rated speed vrated
≤ 2.5 m/s
Travel height, TH
≤ 100 m
Travel height, TH
≤ 175 m
Type of protection, rope breaking switch
IP 54 (optional IP67)
Type of protection, rope breaking switch
IP 67 or EEx d IIc T6
Rope engagement point (back of rail)
40 mm
Distance X Guide rail 150 mm
right
Rope engagement point (back 40 mm of rail)
T70
T89 / T90
T125 / T127
●
---
---
200 mm
●
●
●
250 mm
●
●
●
Issue 09/2017
T70
T89 / T90
T125 / T127
T140-1 / T140-2
150 mm
●
---
---
---
Distance X 200 mm
●
●
●
---
250 mm
●
●
●
---
Distance X 300 mm with exten- 350 mm sion 400 mm
---
---
●
●
---
---
●
●
---
---
●
●
Rail width
- Easy to install thanks to individual attached weight plates
- Galvanised sheet metal design - Mounting in left- and right-hand versions possible → On-site modification possible! - Bracket for mounting the overspeed governor to the guide rail available
140
Overspeed Governor
Overspeed Governor
Accessories
www.liftequip.com
141
Buffer
Oil and Lift Buffers Buffer
Own Notes ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Oil Buffers 01 - 03
144
Oil Buffers 04 - 05
145
Lift Buffers
146
Buffer Uprights
148
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
142
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
143
Buffer
Buffer
Oil Buffers O1 - O3
EN 81-
20/ -50
20/ -50
144
Oil Buffers O4 - O5 Buffer
-conform
Buffer
-conform
EN 81-
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
145
Buffer
Buffer
Lift Buffer
EN 81-
20/ -50
20/ -50
Buffer
-conform
Buffer
-conform
Lift Buffer
EN 81-
D0
D1
D2
D3
D5
The profile of properties • excellent damping characteristics • high volume compressibility with manimal transverse expansion • wide range of permissible loads • good resistance to ozone as well as ultraviolet and energyrich radiation • temperature range -30°C bis +80°C • hydrolysis resistant • all current fixing variants available
Lift buffers - Version Type A D0
D1
D2
D3
D5
Height
H
[mm]
80
80
80
80
80
Active buffer height
h
[mm]
76
74
74
74
74
Buffer diameter
D
[mm]
80
100
100
125
165
S (+1.0) Max. rated speed
4
[mm] v
1,0
[m/s]
Loads P+Q (min-max) Material number
146
6 kg
0.63
[m/s]
1.0
[m/s]
150 - 1200
200 - 1500
250 - 3200
500 - 5200
600 - 7500
180 - 600
220 - 700
330 - 1250
600 – 1850
650 - 2700
6021 000 9222
6021 000 9223
6021 000 9224
6021 000 9225
6021 000 9226
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
147
Buffer Uprights
Buffer Uprights
12
Buffer
Telescopic Buffer Uprights
Buffer
Buffer Uprights
Telescopic Buffer Upright Buffer Upright 530
Buffer Upright 930
Heights
330 mm - 530 mm
570 mm - 930 mm
Adjustable Range
200 mm (40mm-steps)
360 mm (45mm-steps)
Steel thickness
4 mm
4 mm
Part No.
6010 000 9403
6010 000 9400
• maximum load: 2600 kg (each buffer upright) • speeds of up to max. 1 m/s • suitable for spring buffer P2 and P1 Part number.
148
Type
Spring buffer perm. Q+P 2600 kg L
Oil bufer perm. Q+P 3020kg L
d in mm
6010 000 9441
FK
715 GG
---
Width of guide blade SKB [mm]
16
Width of guide blade SKB [mm]
Width of guide blade SKB [mm] Counterweight Force G [kN]
152
RT 18 Roller Guide Car (FK)
5 - 16 35
Width of guide blade SKB [mm] Conterweight Force G [kN]
9 - 16 50
Guiding Force Pstat [N]
1250 // 1350
Guiding Force Pdyn [N]
500 // 600 Issue 09/2017
Guiding Force Pstat [N] Guiding Force Pdyn [N]
www.liftequip.com
2500 800
16 // 19 // 28,6
Guiding Force Pstat [N]
3000
Guiding Force Pdyn [N]
depends on spring calibrationg
153
Guides
Guides
Roller Guides
Roller Guides
Guides
WRG
Guides
WRG
WRG 125 Roller Guide Car (FK)
WRG 150 Roller Guide Car (FK) & Counterweight (GG)
WRG 200 Roller Guide Car (FK)
WRG Roller Guides WRG 80
WRG 100
WRG 125
WRG 150
WRG 200
60730009208
60730009209
60730009210
60730009206
60730009211
Speed vn max. -> FK
---
---
---
3,5 m/s
5,0 m/s
Speed vn max. -> GG
2,5 m/s
3,5 m/s
7,0 m/s
7,0 m/s
---
Width of the guide blade SKB [mm]
9 16
9 16
9 16
16 19
16 19
Counterweight Force G [N]
100
100
100
100
---
Guiding Force Pstat [N]
---
---
---
3000
3000
Guiding Force Pdyn [N]
---
---
---
900
900
A [mm]
80
100
125
150
200
B [mm]
126
143,5
151
200
250
C [mm]
175
150
150
220
220
D [mm]
200
228
266
300+SKB
555
Dimensions
154
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
155
Guides
Guides
Sliding Guides I
Sliding Guides I
Guides
Ultramid, PUR II
Guides
PUR I, Eco
Sliding Guide: Car (FK) Eco
Sliding Guide: Car (FK) & Counterweight (GG) Ultramid
Sliding Guide: Counterweight (GG) PUR I
Sliding Guides PUR I
Sliding Guide: Car (FK) PUR II
Sliding Guides Eco
6073073010
156
Sliding Guides Ultramid
60730009222
60730009204
Sliding Guides PUR II
6073069010
6073063010
6073027010
6073066010
Speed vn max. -> FK
---
Speed vn max. -> FK
1,0 m/s
1,0 m/s
Speed vn max. -> FK
---
1,75 m/s
1,75 m/s
Speed vn max. -> FK
1,75 m/s
Speed vn max. -> GG
1,75 m/s
Speed vn max. -> GG
---
---
Speed vn max. -> GG
3,5 m/s
3,5 m/s
---
Speed vn max. -> GG
---
9
16
Width of tguide blade SKB [mm]
16
Width of guide blade SKB [mm]
5
Width of guide blade SKB [mm]
9
16
Width of guide blade SKB [mm]
5
Counterweight Force G [kN
20
Guiding Force Pstat [N]
1700
1700
Counter Weight Force G [kN]
50
100
---
Guiding Force Pstat [N]
2000
Guiding Force Pdyn [N]
600
600
Guiding Force Pstat [N]
---
1700
1700
Guiding Force Pdyn [N]
800
Guiding Force Pdyn [N]
---
600
600
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
157
Guides
Guides
Sliding Guides II
Sliding Guides II Guides
GG-25I, GG25 II
Guides
Nylon, Aclamid
Sliding Guide: Car (FK) Nylon
Sliding Guide Nylon 6073046010
2,0 // 2,5 m/s
2,0 // 2,5 m/s
16
16
Guiding Force Pstat [N]
2500 // 2000
2500 // 2000
Guiding Force Pdyn [N]
1000 // 800
1000 // 800
Width of guide blade SKB [mm]
Sliding Guide: Car (FK) GG-25 II
Sliding Guide Aclamid
6073047010* Speed vn max. -> FK
Sliding Guide: Car (FK) Aclamid
Width of guide blade SKB [mm]
Guiding Force Pstat [N] Guiding Force Pdyn [N]
13242
a
205
280
b
250
480
c
200
400
l
280
300
n
92
130
Sliding Guide GG-25 II
6073068010 Speed vn max. -> FK
06240
Speed vn max. -> FK
1,0 // 1,75 m/s
Width of guide blade SKB [mm]
16
6073206240
6073213242
0,63 m/s
0,63 m/s
16
28,6
6000 // 5000
Guiding Force Pstat [N]
18000
34000
3000 // 2500
Guiding Force Pdyn [N]
7000
13000
* inkl. Befestigungsteile für Schmierapparat 60 740 04 01 0
158
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
159
Guides
Guides
Guides
Lubricators for Sliding Guides
Guides
Lubricators for Sliding Guides
Lubricator 60740009201 for Sliding Guides PUR I 6073073010 Ultramid 6073069010 Ultramid 6073063010 Ultramid 6073027010 GG-25 II 6073213242
Lubricator 6074004010 for Sliding Guides Nylon 6073046010 Nylon 6073047010 GG-25 I 6073214240 GG-25 II 6073206240
Sliding Guide Car With guide shoe HSM 6073208250
Lubricator AK10 6074009010
Oil drip receptacle (SKB = 5-16 mm) 60160006205
For sliding guide car
And Aclathan inserts 6073217240 (9 mm) 6073216240 (16 mm) (Mounting on bottom beam)
OPTIONAL: Mounting elbow for mounting the lubricator AK10 above/below the car sling 60748902980 (Lubricator AK10 is available for every type of sliding guide)
Sliding Guide 6073208250 (Guide shoe) inkl. insert
Speed vn max. -> FK
0,5 - 2,0 m/s
Speed vn max. -> GG
---
Width of guide blade SKB [mm]
160
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
5-16
161
Rope Pulleys
Rope Pulleys and Accessories Rope Pulleys
Own Notes ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Cast iron-/Polyamid-Pulleys
164
Accessories
165
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
162
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
163
Rope Pulleys
Rope Pulleys
Cast iron-/Polyamid-Pulleys
Accessories Rope Pulleys
Rope Pulleys
Roller bearings
• Highest precision and smoothness • Extremely resilient • Extremely attractive price / performance ratio Axles for Rope Pulleys
D [mm] 150 150 150 2401 2601 3201 3601 360 360 3602 3603 3604 400 4001 4501 4501 450 450 4502 450 4503 4504 540 540 5402 5403 5404 540 5402 5403 5404 6404 7404
Ropes z*Ø 7x6 10x6 12x6 12x6 6*6,5 8*8 7*8 7*8 7*8 7*8 z*d z*d 4*10 8*10 7*10 7*10 7*10 7*10 7*10 8*10 z*d z*d 7*8 7*13 7*13 z*d z*d 8*13 8*13 z*d z*d z*d z*d
RA [mm] 12 12 10 10 11 14 14 15 18 18 18 18 18 20 18 20 20 18 18 20,5 20,5 20,5 20,5 -
Bp35 [mm] 110 145 145 132 82 130 127 118 140 140 140 140 90 163 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 190 190 190 190 240 240
Axle X Y Y Z 0 1 1 2 3 3 3 3 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 9
Bearing Type 6310 2RS 6310 2RS 6310 2RS 6310 2RS 6310 2RS NSK 6310 6310 2RS 6310 2RS 6310 2RS NJ 310 E 6310 2RS NJ 310 E 6310 2RS 6312 2RS 6312 2RS 6312 2RS 6312 2RS 6312 2RS NJ 312 E 6312 2RS 6312 2RS NJ 312 E 6216 2RSR 6216 2RSR NJ 216 E 6216 2RSR NJ 216 E 6216 2RSR NJ 216 E 6216 2RSR NJ 216 E NJ 2218 NJ 224
Part number 6072 000 9255 6072 000 9229 6072 000 9265 6250 000 0057 6072 000 7798 6072 000 9341 60 720 76 42 0 6072 000 3603 60 720 54 42 0 60 720 60 42 0 60 720 71 42 0 60 720 71 42 0 60 720 67 42 0 6072 000 9342 6072 000 4885 6072 000 4884 60 720 68 42 0 60 720 55 42 0 60 720 62 42 0 60 720 58 42 0 60 720 72 42 0 60 720 72 42 0 60 720 69 42 0 60 720 65 42 0 60 720 44 42 0 60 720 73 42 0 60 720 73 42 0 60 720 66 42 0 60 720 59 42 0 60 720 73 42 0 60 720 73 42 0 6072 000 0984 6072 000 0976
Axle1 X Y Z 0 1 2 3.0 3.1 4
Ø-Axle
5
60 mm
6 7 8 9 1)
50 mm
80 mm 90 mm 120 mm
Length 147 mm 182 mm 200 mm 111 mm 166 mm 135 mm 190 mm 240 mm 132 mm 216 mm 240 mm 230 mm 260 mm 305 mm 310 mm
Part number 6072 000 9240 6072 000 9234 6250 000 0058 6072 000 8541 60 723 53 32 0 6072 000 3604 60 723 34 32 0 60 723 50 32 0 60 723 37 32 0 60 723 35 32 0 60 723 51 32 0 60 723 47 32 0 60 723 32 32 0 6072 000 0981 6072 000 0980
relevant axle-numers see page before
Axle Brackes For Rope Pulley Ø 240 mm Ø 360 mm Ø 400 mm Ø 450 mm Ø 540 mm Ø 640 mm Ø 740 mm
40x3x65
Part number 6250 000 0059 00 981 03 61 0 00 981 03 61 0 00 981 03 61 0 00 981 04 61 0 00 981 04 61 0 00 981 05 61 0
Pedestal Bearing for Deflection Pulley Fixed on Concrete Foundation (including axle) For Axle 3 5 6 8
Part number 61 720 07 25 0 61 720 08 25 0 60 720 64 25 2 60 720 65 25 2
Specialty: 1Polyamide-pulley, 2High load, 3Variabele*, 4Variabele* and High load, 5Overall width of rope pulley, incl. bearing *Variabele with grooves (z), groove diameter (d), groove distance (RA) .
164
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
165
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A Doors
Own Notes ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Product Benefits
168
General Notes
169
Landing Door S8A
170
Car Door K8A
171
Project planning
172
Steel sheet/stainless steel doors - surfaces
174
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Steel sheet/stainless steel doors - fire protection
175
Glass Doors
176
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Door Sills
178
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Door safety lock system
179
F9 Door Drive
180
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Technical Information
181
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Special versions
182
Structure of the landing door
184
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Layout of the car door
185
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Modernisation for Door Drive F9
187
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
166
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
167
Comfort Door
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
S8A / K8A
EN 81-
20/ -50
Product Benefits
General Notes Doors Türen
Doors Türen
-conform
Design
Flexibility
Range of application
Fire protection safety standards
Panelling in numerous surface designs, glass door panels, aluminium and stainless-steel door sills and surrounding invisible sill guides enable individual adaptation to the design requirements in the building
Very wide and finely graded range of options for door dimensions, with door widths from 700 to 2500 mm and door heights from 2000 to 2500 mm One-side opening, double-panel telescopic door (M2T) for optimum door width in a narrow shaft Centre-opening, double-panel door (M2Z) for short door running times and high handling capacity Centre-opening, four-panel telescopic door (M4TZ) for maximum door widths with good utilisation of space Comprehensive range of options and special versions for individual adaptation
The S8A / K8A comfort elevator doors are used in passenger and freight elevators with high standards with regard to quiet running, handling capacity and comfort.
The landing doors are fire-tested in line with DIN EN 81-58 with regard to fire resistance. This means the door can be used in the majority of export markets if fire protection safety standards are required for the landing doors. DIN EN 81-58 is included in building regulations list A, part 1 of the German Institute for Building Technology. This means that the landing doors with this fire resistance test can be deployed in Germany.
Safety Compliance with currently valid EU standards EN 81-20/-50 and national safety regulations High-quality door safety lock systems and short door reversal times for the safety of passengers and to protect the technology against damage Efficiency Time-saving installation resulting from clever, installation-friendly mounting solutions for short downtimes Short door opening and closing times reduce waiting periods and increase the handling capacity of the installation Comfort Low noise of ≤ 55 dB(A), measured one metre in front of the landing door Excellent smooth running properties and isolation from structure-borne sound as a result of mounts protected from vibration on the elevator car (SA 79) Harmonious and smooth door movements as a result of frequency-controlled door drive with adjustable running characteristic curves
Innovation Optimum utilisation of space and short floor-to-floor distances possible as a result of compact design of the door header Stable, single-leaf landing door panels in sandwich design with low weight and without weld seams
Door type M2T, opening to the left
Door type M2T, opening to the right
The 2-panel, centre-opening sliding door (M2Z) is conceived for passenger elevators with a short door running time and high handling capacity. Door type M2Z, centre-opening
S8A M2Z, stainless steel, leather surface
Reliability Safe and robust mechanical construction with powerful door drive Long service life as a result of the exclusive deployment of proven and tested materials and components Ensuring a rapid and long lasting spare parts availability
Planning recommendation Elevators should be planned in such a way that they can also be used without difficulty by elderly and disabled persons. The minimum dimensions for elevator doors stipulated in the standard DIN 18040 (formerly DIN 18024/18025) for barrier-free construction are 900 mm door width and 2000 mm door height. In the case of modernisation measures, these minimum dimensions should be complied with, circumstances in the building permitting.
S8A M2T, glass door with frame, stainless steel grain 220
The S8A landing doors in the corresponding special version (SA) also comply with other fire protection requirements such as BS476 (GB) and GOST (RU-UKR). The S8A glass doors are not available with a fire protection safety standard and are therefore not suitable for the partitioning of fire-protected zones.
Compliance with special requirements The comprehensive range of options (SA – special versions) means the door is suitable for deployment with special requirements consisting of special standards and regulations, for example in accordance with EN 81-70 Accessibility of elevators for persons, including disabled persons DIN EN 81-71 Protective measures against wilful destruction (vandalism), categories 0 or 1 only after consultation DIN EN 81-72 Fire service elevators Noise The noise characteristics of the door depend on the door dimensions, door panelling, installation conditions and door running times. At a distance of 1 metre to the landing door, an airborne noise level of ≤ 55 dB(A) can be assumed. SA – special version
Mounting of the base door sill support
SA – special version
168
The 4-panel, centre-opening telescopic sliding door (M4TZ) is mainly used in passenger and freight elevators with a high handling capacity and large door widths with small shaft dimensions.
Door type M4TZ, centre-opening
Mounting of the suspension gear with wall plugs
Scope of Supply Doors complete with required fastening material, basic body of the door sill, guide rail profile of the door sill and toeguards Rasterising of the door height and door widths in increments of 50 mm possible (SA 20); with door type M4TZ with DW ≥ 1400 mm in increments of 100 mm
The 2-panel, side-opening telescopic sliding door (M2T) is used mainly in passenger elevators to achieve a door width that is as large as possible in relation to the shaft width.
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
Securing bracket with large adjustable ranges for anchor rails with wall plug fixture (SA 38)
169
Comfort Door
Comfort Door
Doors Türen
K8A Car Door
Doors Türen
S8A Landing Door
Door panels
Door panels
The door panels are single-leaf, manufactured using noise-inhibiting sandwich design and offer outstanding corrosion protection. The basic body consists of 2 mm galvanised steel plate and is either laminated with 0.6 mm galvanised steel plate or with 0.8 mm stainless steel plate. Powder coating of the galvanised version is also possible. The lower door panel guide in the door sill for each door panel consists of two adjustable sliders. Rubber buffers are fitted to the closing edge to buffer impacts and reduce noise. In the case of landing doors that lead out-doors, we recommend the use of door panels clad with stainless steel. In the case of fire resistant doors with heat insulation criterion, the door panels are filled with an additional technical heat insu-lation.
The structure of the door panels with the door panel guides corresponds to the highquality technical designs described for the landing door. In the case of elevator car doors, on the other hand, no door panels with fire protection safety standards and heat insulation are deployed. Door drive The door drive that is used is a highqality, gearless and frequency-controlled asynchronous motor with integrate control device. The power transmission to the door panels is low-noise by means of a belt drive that is highly resistant to wear. The machine is very compact and does not protrude beyond the projection area of the suspension gear. It is mounted on the suspension gear of the car door and protected from vibration.
Door mounting The sheet metal casing of the suspension gear of the car door is bolted directly onto the car roof using brackets. Mounting that is protected from vibration is available as an option (SA 79). The elevator car can be up to 300 mm higher than the door height (optionally up to 500 mm, SA 40). The car door portal is not included in the scope of delivery of the car door.
Door frame The door frame comprises: the upper suspension gear made of folded 2.5 mm galvanised steel plate; the side door posts made of folded 1.5 mm galvanised steel plate; and the lower door sill made of folded 2 mm galvanised steel plate with boltedon aluminium or stainless steel profile S8A M2Z, hook lock with contacts
Suspension gear with stable, profiled guide rail
The landing doors are coupled by means of a widening cam fastened to the car door. This is operated and moved by the toothed belt of the machine.
Flooring The customer-fitted flooring can be laid directly up to the outer door panel facing the hallway. Even more elegance is created with the door sill with surrounding guide of the door panels (SA 18): the flooring can be laid up to the shaft edge. The same possibility applies to the car door (SA 18).
The type of protection for the entire door is IP20. An IP54 version is available as an option (SA 13).
Precisely adjustable gap of the door panels to one another 170
170
Mounting of the suspension gear on the elevator car Non-insulated mounting using a number of brackets directly with the car roof. Insulated mounting (SA 79) with rubber insulation to reduce the transmission of vibrations to the car roof.
Sill with encompassing guide (SA 18)
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
SA – special version
171
Comfort Door
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
S8A / K8A
Doors Türen
Project Planning
Doors Türen
Project Planning
Installation options for the landing doors 68
Detail A (M2T/M4TZ)
(150 with SA 27)
1,5 x DW 20 TB ++50
Door type M2Z (2-panel, centre-opening)
≥ 30 + CDT BT
22xxDW TB + 50
6 72
6
M16
72 190
100
FFL OFF
Sill profile
Schwellenprofil Sill profile
Basic body
Grundkörper Basic body
Mounting bracket
M16
Mounting bracket Befestigungswinkel Toeguard
Toeguard
Detail B (M2Z)
Detail B (M2T/M4TZ)
Door architrave Türzarge
40 36 34
2200 2300
FFL OFF
• • •
• • • • •
• • • • • •
2400 DW TB
125
2500
125
Door type M4TZ (4-panel, telescopic centre-opening)
≥≥ 3030+ +CDT BT
≥ 30 + CDT BT
1,5 50 1,5 xx DW TB ++ 50 (1,5 x DW + 70 with DW < 900 mm)
125
DW TB 1,5 100 1,5 xx DW TB ++ 100
125
295
DW
2000 2100 2200
CDT BT
125 140
DH
2300 2400
800 - 950 1000 - 1150 1200 - 1350 1400 - 1500 1800 - 2500
• •
• • •
• • • •
2500
• • • • •
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 up to DW ≤ 1400 mm.
• • • • • •
All mass in mm; DH – door height, DW – door width; CDT – construction dimension tolerance / deflection from plumb (± 25 mm); SA – special version
Sill profile
Nische
M16
Mounting bracket Toeguard
A
B
A
36
Sill profile Schwellenprofil Basic body Grundkörper
Basic body
M16
Befestigungswinkel Mounting bracket Toeguard Schürze
B
Recess
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
22xxDW TB + 100
Recess
190
900 - 1400
190
800 - 850
90
235
2100
700 - 750
40
40 x 40 (SA 19)
40 x 40 (SA 19)
FFL OFF
90
DW
2000
CDT BT
85 120
DH
85 ≤6
125 ≤6 ≤6
Door architrave
Schürze
72 90
≥≥30 30++CDT BT
36
6
125
40
Türzarge
72
DW TB
125
≤6
Door architrave 40 x 40 (SA 19)
40 x 40 (SA 19) OFF FFL
SD ST ST
300
2500
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
SD ST
300
2400
ST
125 ≤6 ≤6 40 36 34
Door architrave
TH
• • • • • •
100
2300
900 - 1400
• • • • •
STWH min. = DH + 590 STWH min. = TH + 590 (STWH min. = DH + 450 for SA 12) (STWH = TH=450 SA 12) STWH min.min. TH +bei 590
2200
800 - 850
• • •
85
FFL UFL OFF OFF ORF ORF
100
295
2100
700 - 750
100
DW
2000
CDT BT
125
140
DH
Detail A (M2Z)
6
FFL UFL OFF OFF ORF ORF
(1,5 x DW + 45 for SA 18)
DH TH (STWH min.= TH 450 bei SA 12)
CDT ≥ 30 + BT
1,5 x DW 25 TB ++25
STWH min. = TH + 590 STWH min. = DH + 590 (STWH = TH=450 SA 12) STWH min.min. TH +bei 590 (STWH min. = DH + 450 for SA 12) (STWH TH min.= TH 450 bei SA 12) DH TH
CDT ≥ 30 + BT
90
Door type M2T (2-panel, one-sided telescopic opening)
Installation in the shaft
Installation in recess / in the landing
The landing doors are fastened to the shaft wall by means of brackets. The brackets are secured to the wall optionally with wall plugs or with securing bolts on anchor rails (measurement in concrete in line with CEN/ TS 1992-4:2009) that are cast into the shaft wall or welded onto a shaft scaffold.
In the interest of economical utilisation of space, the landing door can be installed in a recess. Recesses with greater depth are possible as an option (SA 60). The different recess depths are specified in the table below.
If your requirements or wishes go beyond the range of options described, please contact our experienced sales team.
Recess depth Without recess
With recess
SA 11
Standard
SA 60
M2T S8A
0 mm
55 mm
100 mm
M2Z S8A
0 mm
20 mm
60 mm
M4TZ S8A
0 mm
55 mm
100 mm
Door type
With deep recess
All mass in mm; DH – door height; STWH – floor height; SD – shaft depth; UFL – unfinished floor level; FFL – finished floor level; SA – special version
172
172
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
173
Comfort Door
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
S8A / K8A Doors Türen
Steel sheet / stainless steel doors – fire protection
Doors Türen
Steel sheet / stainless steel doors – surfaces
Surface versions The door panels of the landing and elevator car doors consist of 2 mm galvanised steel plate and are clad either with 0.6 mm galvanised steel plate or with 0.8 mm stainless steel plate. For the galvanised version, an additional powder coating is also possible. The same applies to the surface versions for the door frames and front walls of the elevator shaft.
Door panels
Doors with fire protection safety standards
Door panel, front / visible side
Standard version
Door panel, back
Door panel with fire protection safety standards (back)
Stainless steel
The standard versions of the landing doors comply with the requirements of the type approval in accordance with EN 81-20/-50. In addition to this, other criteria in line with in part country-specific guidelines and regulations such as EN 81-58, BS 476 and GOST apply to the special fire protection versions.
Standard version Electrolytically galvanised steel plate surfaces for painting on site.
Electrolytically galvanised steel surface
Painting Different types of painting are possible with a high-quality powder coating method (60 μm): Basic colour shade Mouse Grey RAL 7005 / powder coating Traffic White RAL 9016 / powder coating White Aluminium RAL 9006 / powder coating Colour RAL / powder coating
Leather / stainless steel
Linen / stainless steel
Other versions available on request. 174
174
White Aluminium RAL 9006 / powder coating
Colour RAL / powder coating
Grain 220 / stainless steel, ferritic
Grain 220 / stainless steel, austenitic
Issue 09/2017
M4TZ
EN 81-58
Standard
DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
DW 800 – 2500 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
EW30
EN 81-58
SA 104
DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2200 mm galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
DW 800 – 2000 mm DH 2000 – 2200 mm galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
EW60
EN 81-58
SA 105
DW 700 – 1100 mm DH 2000 – 2200 mm panelled with stainless steel
DW 800 – 1100 mm DH 2000 – 2200 mm panelled with stainless steel
EI60
EN 81-58
SA 106
DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
DW 800 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
DW 800 – 2500 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
EI120
EN 81-58
SA 109
-
DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
-
EI120
GOST (RU and UKR)
SA 101
DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
DW 1400 – 2500 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
2h-Integrity
BS 476
SA 100
DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
DW 800 – 2500 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
E30
GOST (only RU)
SA 100
DW 700 – 1400 mm DH 2000 – 2500 mm galvanised, powder coated, panelled with stainless steel
-
Mouse Grey RAL 9016 / powder coating
Traffic White RAL 9016 / powder coating
M2Z
E120
Painting
Rhombus / stainless steel, ferritic or austenitic, only available for landing door
Stainless steel Panelling with 0.8 mm stainless steel plate: Leather / stainless steel Linen / stainless steel Rhombus / stainless steel, ferritic or austenitic, only available for landing door Grain 220 / stainless steel, ferritic Grain 220 / stainless steel, austenitic
M2T
Fire protection classifications for S8A landing door
Not all combinations of door height / door width are available; details on request. SA – special version
www.liftequip.com
175
Comfort Door
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
S8A / K8A Doors Türen
Glass Doors
Doors Türen
Glass Doors
Glass door panels
Glass door panels with available dimensions
The S8A / K8A comfort glass door panels are designed with a surrounding door panel frame on all sides at a width of 50 mm. Fully glazed door panels are also available on request (SA 41).
Door width
Door width
700 - 1400
2200
700 - 1300
2300
800 - 1300
2400
800 - 1300
2500
900 - 1300
50
700 - 1400
2100
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
TB [mm]
2000
700 - 1200
2100
700 - 1200
2200
700 - 1150
2300
800 - 1100
2400
800 - 1050
2500
900 - 1000
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
Door type M2T (2-panel, one-sided telescopic opening), glass door panels with frame (Fig. on left) and fully glazed door panels (Fig. on right) Glass door panels with frame (SA 31)
Fully glazed door panels (SA 41)
Door width
Door width Fully lazed door panels (SA 41)
Frame glass door panels (SA 31)
2000
700 - 1400
700 - 1200
2100
700 - 1400
2100
700 - 1200
2200
700 - 1150
2300
800 - 1100
2400
800 - 1050
2500
900 - 1000
Door height
50
TB [mm]
2000
700 - 1300
2300
800 - 1300
2400
800 - 1300
2500
900 - 1200
6 mm
2)
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
Closing edge
50
Closing edge
Panelling of the suspension gear on the shaft side, optional
TH [mm]
2200
6 mm
2x50
Door height
50 2x25
1)
Door type M2Z (2-panel, centre-opening), glass door panels with frame (Fig. on left) and fully glazed door panels (Fig. on right)
Frame glass door panels (SA 31)
2x50
2)
Closing edge
TB [mm]
2000
1300 - 2500
TH [mm]
TB [mm]
2100
1300 - 2500
2200
1300 - 2500
2000
1400 - 2200
2300
1300 - 2500
2100
1400 - 2200
2400
1400 - 2400
2200
1400 - 2200
2500
1600 - 2300
2300
1600 - 2200
2400
1600 - 2100
2500
1800 - 2000
Fully lazed door panels (SA 41)
Door height
1)
6 mm
2x25
Door height
100
TH [mm]
6 mm
50
50
Door width
50
On glass door panels, the cam elbows of the widening cam of the elevator car door protrude into the visible area. If this is not visible, a shortened version of the widening cam (SA 30) can be selected. On this version, however, levelling with opening doors is not possible.
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm. Foe door sill without visible guide (SA 18) as of DW ≥ 1400 mm.
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
Closing edge
50
Door width
50
Panelling of the suspension gear on the shaft side, optional
TB [mm]
TH [mm]
50
50
In the case of the centre-opening doors (M2Z, M4TZ), the closing edge is optionally designed as a 25-mm-wide frame (SA 33), so that the closed door visually has a frame width of 50 mm at the closing edge. The other three sides of the frame have also a width of 50 mm, giving the door an even more elegant appearance. In the case of glass doors, we recommend for reasons of visual appearance that the light grid be mounted as stationary on the car door at the end of the running rail and at the end of the guide rail profile.
TH [mm]
Closing edge
50
Closing edge
2000
6 mm
6 mm
50
TB [mm]
50
Door height
The glass door panel frames have a basic coating and can be given any surface finish which is available for sheet metal door panels. The glass panes are fitted flush with the door panel frame. The glass panes are made of composite safety glass (TVG and VSG-V) and are transparent.
TH [mm]
Door height
50 100
The gap between the glass door panel and door post or portal is limited to a maximum of 4 mm to safeguard against the danger of children's hands being drawn in.
Fully lazed door panels (SA 41)
Frame glass door panels (SA 31)
50
Door type M4TZ (4-panel, telescopic centre-opening), glass door panels with frame (Fig. on left) and fully glazed door panels (Fig. on right) 1) For glass door panels (SA 31), combined with narrow frame (SA 33). 2) For glass door panels (SA 31). Edge protection with width 15 mm available as an option for solid glass doors (SA 47). SA – special version. All specified dimensions in mm. SA – special version
176
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
177
Comfort Door
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
S8A / K8A Doors Türen
Door Safety Lock System
Doors Türen
Door Sills
Door sills
Door safety lock systems The doors can be equipped with different, opto-electronic systems for door safety: High-resolution light grid (Standard) High-resolution 3D light grid with motion detection system (SA 45) Motion detection system (SA 25) The systems are always equipped with the electronic evaluation unit required in each case. The standard high-resolution light grid is a no-contact opto-electronic door safety system. Transmitter and receiver units are integrated in the door panels. Between the two, a light grid is created up to a height of 200 cm; this has 36 parallel and 174 crossed light beams. Interrupting one or more of the light beams triggers reversing of the door drive. The device works with invisible alternating light in the infrared range. Thanks to the high sensivity it is also
The basic body of the shaft door sill is made of angled steel plate. As default, sill profiles made of aluminium with permitted wheel loads of 280 kg are mounted. Alongside these, stainless steel door sills for 500 kg (SA 15) and 1500 kg (SA 16) wheel loads are also available.
Aluminium door sill for permitted wheel loads up to 280 kg as standard version
Stainless steel door sill for permitted wheel loads up to 500 kg, profiled stainless steel guide (SA 15)
Standard light grid
convenient for systems according to EN 81-70. Even more comfort is provided by a highresolution light grid with integrated motion detection system (SA 45).The closing operation of the door then reversed when persons or objects approach the door. This light grid cannot be used for glass doors. Even more comfort is provided by a highresolution light grid with integrated motion detection system (SA 45). The closing operation of the door then reversed when persons or objects approach the door. This light grid cannot be used for glass doors. In addition, a facility for monitoring the area in front of the door with body heat detection can be installed in the car door portal (SA 25). Only rapid changes in temperature are detected, which means that changes in the ambient temperature or stationary persons have no influence on the system.
Wheel load QRL on the door still Distance between wheels a
Monitoring ranges of the high-resolution light grid with integrated motion detection system (SA 45)
Door width DW
Door sill Aluminium (standard) Stainless steel (SA 15)
Max. wheel load
Max. overall sill load
QRL
a < 400 mm a ≥ 400 mm
280 kg
280 kg
560 kg
500 kg
500 kg
1000 kg
Stainless steel (SA 16)
1500 kg
1500 kg
3000 kg
Surrounding guide (SA 18)
500 kg
500 kg
1000 kg
DW – door width, QRL – wheel load, a – distance between wheels.
178
Stainless steel door sill (only for M4TZ) for permitted wheel loads up to 1,500 kg, solid stainless steel profile (SA 16)
Door sill with surrounding guide the flooring can be laid up to the shaft edge (SA 18); optionally with flat stainless steel profile (SA 17) SA – special version
High-resolution light grid with integrated motion detection system (SA 45)
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
Monitoring range of the motion detection system (SA 25)
SA – special version
179
Comfort Door
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
S8A / K8A Doors Türen
Technical Information
Doors Türen
F9 Door Drive
Technical details
F9 door drive The F9 door drive is a compact unit consisting of a gearless, frequency-controlled asynchronous motor with integrate control device. It is mounted vertically and protected from vibration on the suspension gear of the car door. A horizontal arrangement is possible as an option.
M2T
M2Z
M4TZ
S8A landing door / K8A car door Permitted dimensions for steel plate doors 1) Door width
DW
[mm]
Door height
DH
[mm]
700 – 1400 / 100 mm grid
800 – 2500 / 100 mm grid
2000 – 2500 / 100 mm grid
Materials for steel plate doors Suspension gear
A high-resolution encoder supplies the drive with all the necessary information with regard to position and speed of the door panels at all times. This means that no limit switches are required to detect the door position. The power transmission to the door panels is linear and low-noise by means of a belt drive that is highly resistant to wear. The door panels of the landing door are moved by a widening cam without play. Automatic commissioning takes place via a convenient teach-in function. At high ambient temperatures, the motor and control device can be placed in separate units (on request).
Technical description Motor: six-pole asynchronous motor Control device: integrate frequency inverter, clock frequency 16 kHz, V/f characteristic Type of protection: IP54 EMC: in accordance with EN 12015/16 Interfaces: 24 V logic level, potential separation, programmable special output Parameterisation: via PC Diagnosis: event stack Connection voltage: 230 V, 50/60 Hz Ambient conditions – 10 °C to + 50 °C Dimensions: (as of flange area) W x H x D = 260 x 200 x 115 mm
Steel plate 2.5 mm, galvanised
Door posts
Steel plate 1.5 mm, galvanised
Door sill
Door panels
Basic body:
folded steel plate 2.0 mm, galvanised
Guide rail profile:
made of aluminium or stainless steel (SA), bolted on
Structure:
single-leaf, manufactured using noise-inhibiting sandwich design
Basic body:
folded steel plate 2.0 mm, galvanised
Panelling:
steel plate 0.6 mm, galvanised or stainless steel plate 0.8 mm or
Additional features / functions Automatic commissioning as well as and functional test, including automatic learning of door mass, closing force limitation of 150 N, limitation of kinetic energy, door width, opening direction, running characteristic curve generation for door movement. Approaching a detected obstacle: if the door strikes an obstacle on closing that was not detected by the light grid (e.g. due to a stone in the door sill), it is re-opened. The previously determined rise in force causes the door drive to deceler-ate in the next closing operation even be-fore the position of the obstacle. Conse-quently, there is a significant reduction in the levelling speed. If no other obstacle is detected, the door drive accelerates again to normal speed after reopening to the position of the obstacle. Partial opening: after reopening, the opening width of the door can be reduced if desired. The door drive has an event stack that stores errors and warnings in nonvolatile form with date and time. Other activation options, see operating manual.
Running characteristic curve setting / parameterisation The control system electronics calculate the running characteristic curve depending on the path travelled. The running characteristic curve contains a special profile for operation of the door cam by the door drive. All the parameters of the running characteristic curve for opening, closing, nudging and reopening can be defined independently. Learning the maximum possible closing force (moment teach-in).
1
6 2
6
2
4
on opening
3
on closing
Door width x door height DW x DH
[mm]
700 x 2000 - 2200
700 x 2000 - 2200
Door running time s2)
t open / t close
[s]
2.00 / 2.50
1.70 / 2.20
1.90 / 2.40
galv./stainl. steel/glass
[kg]
107 / 111 / 157
106 / 110 / 154
134 / 139 / -
Weight (with DH 2100)
4
Maximum speed v Deceleration Approach speed Widening cam operation (can be deactivated) Widening cam speed Acceleration
3)
800 x 2000 - 2100
Step-on area
[m2]
0.056
0.056
0.064
Door width x door height DW x DH
[mm]
800 x 2000 - 2400
800 x 2000 - 2400
900 x 2000 - 2100
Door running time s2)
t open / t close
[s]
2.30 / 2.80
1.80 / 2.30
1.90 / 2.40
galv./stainl. steel/glass
[kg]
117 / 122 / 168
116 / 121 / 166
143 / 149 / -
Weight (with DH 2100)
3)
Step-on area
[m2]
0.064
0.064
0.072
Door width x door height DW x DH
[mm]
900 x 2000 - 2500
900 x 2000 - 2500
1100 x 2000 - 2200
Door running time s2)
t open / t close
[s]
2.60 / 3.10
1.90 / 2.40
2.00 / 2.50
galv./stainl. steel/glass
[kg]
127 / 132 / 181
125 / 131 / 180
163 / 170 / -
Weight (with DH 2100)
3)
Step-on area
[m2]
0.072
0.072
0.088
Door width x door height DW x DH
[mm]
1000 x 2000 - 2500
1000 x 2000 - 2500
1200 x 2000 - 2300
Door running time s2)
t open / t close
[s]
2.80 / 3.30
2.00 / 2.50
2.00 / 2.50
galv./stainl. steel/glass
[kg]
138 / 144 / 194
137 / 143 / 193
174 / 181 / -
3)
Step-on area
[m2]
0.080
0.080
0.096
Door width x door height DW x DH
[mm]
1100 x 2000 - 2500
1100 x 2000 - 2500
1400 x 2000 - 2400
Door running time s2)
t open / t close
[s]
3.10 / 3.60
2.20 / 2.70
2.20 / 2.70
galv./stainl. steel/glass
[kg]
148 / 155 / 222
147 / 154 / 221
194 / 202 / 304
Weight (with DH 2100)
5
3
5
K8A car door (technical details for selected combinations of door width x door height)
Weight (with DH 2100)
Running characteristic curves (over time t) 1
steel plate 0.6 mm, galvanised with powder coating
3)
Step-on area
[m2]
0.088
0.088
0.112
Door width x door height DW x DH
[mm]
1200 x 2000 - 2500
1200 x 2000 - 2500
1800 x 2000 - 2500
Door running time s2)
t open / t close
[s]
3.30 / 3.90
2.50 / 3.00
2.60 / 3.10
galv./stainl. steel/glass
[kg]
158 / 165 / 233
157 / 164 / 232
233 / 244 / 398
Weight (with DH 2100)
3)
Step-on area
[m2]
0.096
0.096
0.144
Door width x door height DW x DH
[mm]
1400 x 2000 - 2500
1400 x 2000 - 2500
2500 x 2000 - 2500
Door running time s2)
t open / t close
[s]
3.90 / 4.50
3.00 / 3.50
3.80 / 4.30
galv./stainl. steel/glass
[kg]
178 / 186 / -
177 / 185 / -
304 / 318 / -
[m2]
0.112
0.112
0.200
Weight (with DH 2100)
3)
Step-on area
Available combinations of door width / door height, see page 6. Available combinations of door width / door height for landing doors with fire protection safety standard, see page 9. Available combinations of door width / door height for glass doors, see page 10. Door dimensions (DW and DH) optional (SA 20) in the 50 mm grid, available as option with door type M4TZ up to DW 1400 mm. For door types M2T and M2Z, operating and indicator elements are only possible in the door frame up to DW 1300 mm. 2) The opening and closing speeds can be adjusted separately from each other. The specified values are the default settings where the noise development is ≤ 55 dB(A) and the door has very good running proper-ties. 3) Weight determination of car door with the following equipment: galvanised = door panels covered with 0.6 mm galvanised steel sheet, without special equipment; stainless steel = door panels covered with 0.8 mm stainless steel, without special equipment; glass = glass door panels (SA 31 / frame door panels with 0.8 mm stainless steel panelling or SA 41 / fully glazed door panels), with special version 79 / insulated suspension gear mounting and insulated supports). SA – special version 1)
180
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
181
Comfort Door
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
S8A / K8A Doors Türen
Special Versions
Doors Türen
Special Versions
Special versions Special versions SA 4 SA 5 SA 6 SA 7 SA 8 SA 11 SA 12 SA 13 SA 14 SA 15 SA 16 SA 17 SA 18 SA 19 SA 20 SA 21
S8A landing door
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
SA 24
-
SA 25
-
SA 27
•
SA 30
-
SA 31
• • • • • • • •
SA 32 SA 33 SA 34 SA 35 SA 37 SA 38 SA 39 SA 40
-
SA 41
• • • •
SA 42 SA 43 SA 44 SA 45
-
SA 47
• • • • • •
SA 49 SA 51 SA 52 SA 53 SA 54
Special versions K8A car door
Special versions
Description
S8A landing door
K8A car door
• • • • • • • • • •
•
Double-leaf door panels
-
Labyrinth at the closing edge, only in conjunction with SA 55 and only for M2Z and M4TZ
-
Recess in the door post for cover plate, not for M2Z with front wall of the elevator shaft
-
Deep recess of 100 mm (M2T, M4TZ) or 60 mm (M2Z), for aluminium door sill with permitted wheel load (QRL) up to 280 kg
-
Additional switch mounting for monitoring, protection type IP20
-
Version without shaft door toeguard; a clamping bracket is used instead
-
Cam mounting for SA 27 in conjunction with an elevator car door of another generation
-
Door suitable for instal. complying with DIN EN 81-71, (available from conversion to DIN EN 81-20/-50)
-
Hook lock with weight (version for example for China), available for M4TZ as of DW ≥ 1400 mm
-
Monitoring of emergency unlocking, scanning, only with M2T
•
Insulated car installation, suspension gear on elevator car and supporting bracket with insulation element
-
Fire protection class 2-h-Integrity complying with BS 476 (GB) and E30 complying with GOST (RU)
-
Display "No Entry" complying with DIN EN 81-73
SA 55
-
Round opening (l 35.6 mm) for indicator elements
SA 56
-
Round opening (l 35.6 mm) for control elements
SA 57
-
Square opening (Y 36.8 mm) for control elements; key switch not possible with M2Z and M4TZ
SA 60
-
Square opening (Y 36.8 mm) for indicator elements
SA 65
-
Door installed in shaft without recess
SA 67
-
Low height between floors STWH up to min. DH + 450 mm
SA 69
•
Type of protection IP 54 (example of use: for door leading outdoor)
SA 71
-
EX version (ATEX), explosion-proof version
SA 74
• • • •
Stainless steel sill profile, profiled, permitted wheel load (QRL) up to 500 kg
SA 75
Stainless steel sill profile, solid, permitted wheel load (QRL) up to 1,500 kg, door sill cast in, only available for M4TZ
SA 79
-
Stainless steel profile for SA 18, if flooring us not to go all the way to the sill edge
SA 100
•
-
Profile between the door posts; material: aluminium or stainless steel
• • • • • • •
Door dimensions in the 50 mm grid for door width (DW) and door height (DH), on M4TZ only up to DW ≤ 1400 mm
-
Mounting in the shaft scaffold with M 16 screw, without anchor rails and without wall plugs
•
Glass door panels with door panel frame width at the closing edge of 25 mm, available for M2Z and M4TZ
-
Panelling of the suspension gear on the shaft side and door posts
-
Gap cover for plastering
-
Rubber strip at closing edge
Description
SA 101
•
•
Fire protection class EI60 complying with GOST for Russia, Kazakhstan, Belarus. Fire protection class EI120 complying with GOST for Ukraine. Special version for Russia is available only in combination with SA 55 (in this case not possible with powder coating). Special version for Belarus is available only for door types M2T and M2Z.
Sill heating only in conjunction with door sill SA 18
SA 104
-
Fire protection class E120, EW30 complying with DIN EN 81-58
Intermediate profile for control panel in the recess, only available with insulated mounting (SA 79)
SA 105
-
Fire protection class E120, EW60 complying with DIN EN 81-58
Motion detection system with infrared sensor, deployment in addition to a light grid, installation in the car door portal
SA 106
-
Fire protection class EI60 complying with DIN EN 81-58
Mechanical car door lock complying with DIN EN 81-1/2, if distance between shaft wall and car door sill > 150 mm
SA 109
• • • •
-
Fire protection class EI120 complying with DIN EN 81-58, door width DW = 800-1400 mm and door height DH = 2000-2700 mm
Door sill with surrounding guide of door panels, floor covering thickness up to 40 mm
Short widening cam for panoramic elevators, cam base plate / cam bracket not visible, levelling with opening doors not possible Glass door panels with surrounding door panel frame width of 50 mm, flush-fitted glass panel, stationary mounting of light grid
-
Wall plug fixture
• • •
Halogen-free cables for landing and elevator car door
-
Widened toeguard, up to outer edge of the suspension gear (suspension gear width)
-
Panelling for the entire suspension gear sheet metal casing, for glass shaft
• • •
S8A: delivery device, special toeguard of bottom landing door; K8A: folding toe guard
-
Widened toeguard up to outer edge of the door posts (width of door post)
-
Monitoring of emergency unlocking, locking, only with M2T
-
Type of protection IP x3 / fire service elevator
-
Additional lock for second, faster door panel on M2Z and M4TZ
•
Vision panel in acc. with sample high-rise guideline and EN 81-1, no fire protection with EN 81-58 included
For technical reasons, not all special versions can be combined with one another, details on request.
Mount for 300 mm < (car height – door height) ≤ 500 mm Fully glazed door panels
High-resolution 3D light grid (height up to 1800 mm) with integrate motion detection system (door width up to 1900 mm) Protection of closing edge for solid glass doors, U-profile made of stainless steel
For technical reasons, not all special versions can be combined with one another, details on request.
182
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
183
Comfort Door
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
S8A / K8A
Doors Türen
Layout of the Car Door
Doors Türen
Structure of the Landing Door
Suspension gear
Suspension gear
Shaft securing bracket, to anchor rail or secured with wall plugs
Door drive motor with control device, F9
Door post mounting, secured with wall plugs
Car installation, rigid or insulated (SA 79, not shown)
Carriage
V-groove belt
Hook lock, landing door lock (optional)
Toothed belt Carriage
Sheet metal casing Widening cam Running rail Sheet metal casing Opening post Running rail Door panels Closing edge door post
Basic body of shaft door sill, made of steel plate
Supporting bracket (SA 79, not shown) Door panels Light grids
Guide rail profile, made of aluminium or stainless steel
Basic body of car door sill, made of steel plate
Guide rail profile, made of aluminium or stainless steel
Insulation for supporting bracket (SA 79, not shown)
Shaft securing bracket, to anchor rail or secured with wall plugs Lower door panel guides Shaft door toeguard
Lower door panel guides
Car door toeguard (not shown)
SA – special version
184
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
185
Door Drive
Own Notes ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
■ gearless, frequency-controlled asynchronous motor drive ■ quiet operation ■ maintenance-free and compact unit of motor and controller ■ Controller with clock frequency of 16 kHZ ■ high-resolution shaft encoder ■ high car heights ■ vibration-free drive ■ Protection type IP54 ■ Door width 700-2500 mm ■ after reserving, the width that opens the door can be reduced if desired
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Door-Modernisation Kits:
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
■ programmable special output (virtual switch, closing force limitation, additional end positions signal) ■ Power limitation according to EN81 ■ Diagnostics and Parameterisation automatically or via Laptop ■ Mains voltage: 230V (+10% / -15%) AC voltage, 50/60Hz signal voltage ■ ambient temperature range: -10°C to + 50°C ■ relative humidity max. 70% ■ EMV tested according to EN12015/16 ■ 24V logic level
Doors
Modernisation for Door Drive F9
■ The modernisation solution has been specially designed for the different doors ■ Transmission from the drive to the door through a belt ■ The modernisationkits are independent from the doorwidth, as they can be adjusted on site ■ No necessity for limit switches
Haushahn, TSS72K:
This modernisation kit consists of a console that can be adjusted according to the door width and a special cam that fits to the old door.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Thyssen, M2TD4:
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
This Modernisation Kit consists of the doordrive F9 which replaces the old telescopic arm by the belt. Furthermore it has a console that can be adjusted according to the existing door width and an instruction manual with drawings.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Thyssen, M3TK/2:
With this solution the old doordrive is replaced by the F9 door drive with a belt.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Thyssen, M2Z/ M2T/ M4TZ (D1,G1,D2,W1,W2,W3,W7):
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
This Modernisation Kit consists of the F9 door motor, a simple bracket that fits to the above listed old door drives and a drawing for the installation.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Further Modernisation Kits are available for: Schindler QKS6/QKS8/QKS9/QKS11 For more type of doors that can be modernised, please do not hesitate to contact our sales team.
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
186
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
187
LEMoS®
Own Notes
LEMoS® Modernisation
The Modular Modernisation Solution
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
• Variable modernisation cabin
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
• 320 - 1050 kg
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
• Configurable in millimeter increments
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
• Flexible adaptation of various door
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ manufacturers ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
System advantages
190
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
System advantages / Elevator car P450SV/ P1000SV
191
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Modernisation
192
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Project planning and performance data
196
Project planning data (without dual entrance)
203
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Project planning data (with dual entrance)
204
Project planning data (door mountings)
205
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Technical Data
207
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Elevator Car Design
208
Car Design Options
210
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Lighting system
211
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
188
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
189
LEMoS®
LEMoS®
Flexible degree of modernisation With LEMoS, you can individually modernise by using single components in your elevator installation or perform a complete modernisation. The limits are fluid. What is special about this system is that you can also leave parts in your installation for which replacement would not be technically necessary or make economic sense. This flexibility is unique and carves out a distinct place for LEMoS! LEMoS opens the possibility of a dust-free conversion process and shortening of the conversion time. LEMoS can provide all the mechanical components that can be combined with any control systems available on the market.
System Advantages / Elevator Car P450SV/P1000SV
Optimisation possibilities The LEMoS elevator system is specially tailored to the high, individual requirements in modernisation. Regardless of which aspects are important to you during modernisation, with LEMoS you can optimise and combine them with one another unlike with any other system. We will work together with you to find the optimal solution for your elevator installation, individually tailored to your requirements and wishes.
Flexibility in the drive solution At LEMoS we use cutting-edge drive solutions which are matched to the particular requirements in modernisation. The optimum solution for your installation is chosen from a wide range of gearless and geared drives to suit the application.
LEMoS with geared drive
Increase the energy efficiency of your installation with LEMoS
LEMoS with gearless drive
190
Energy efficiency With the flexible LEMoS system, you can – depending on the scope of the modernised components – considerably improve energy efficiency compared to your existing installation. You can make significant savings for example with the use of standby operation mode or by using frequency inverters with energy recovery capability. Modern LED lighting also increases your energy savings.
All components used by LEMoS are designed so that your modernised installation achieves high levels of energy efficiency in accordance with VDI 4707. You can thereby make a considerable contribution to the reduction of ongoing operating and energy costs and the lowering of CO2 emissions.
Issue 09/2017
System perspective The existing installation is adapted using state of the art technology to provide the very best technical solution within the framework of a modernisation. The customers requirements with regard to his installation and compliance with all current regulations are also considered during planning, project implementation. For a comprehensive modernisation the elevator car component is of central importance. Important aspects here are:
Safety requirements in acc. with EN81-20 Requirements from the German regulation for operational safety of machinery Requirements in acc. with EN 81-70 regarding access for persons with disabilities Energy efficiency in acc. with VDI 4707 Sound insulation requirements
Modernisation
Modernisation
System Advantages
Improved comfort and design with of space utilisation Reusing as many non-value existing components as possible, such as rails, counterweight and possibly door frame, i. e. dust-free conversion and a reduction of costs to the customer. Rapid conversion and short down times Scope of supply and performance Project planning base on the existing shaft dimensions provide the best shaft utilisation thanks to variable elevator car dimensions Modular modernisation in various stages as an option Drive technology, safety components, elevator car, doors as per customer requirements, shaft equipment (rails, bracket, counterweight)
Combination with any control systems and operating and elements available on the market
The elevator car, flexible for modernisation In modernisation there are many constraints that must be taken into consideration in the complex planning of a lift modernisation. From the customer perspective the elevator car is one of the main visible components that must satisfy the requirements with regard to size – disability friendly requirements and design. With the P450SV and P1000SV elevator car series we offer an elevator car that is flexible and adaptable to modernisation needs. The elevator car is a self-supporting construction with integrated car sling for 1:1 suspension. The shaft width and depth dimensions can be adapted in millimetre increments to the existing site conditions ensuring all available area is used. Different elevator car heights are available, together with doors of different manufacturers. As a result of planning the shaft cross-section we can prepared the offer precisely meeting the customers needs.
Innovation Specially developed for modernisation Enlarged elevator car thanks to optimum shaft utilisation Variable concept with flexible width, depth and height dimensions Integrated ventilation slots in the car front wall Flexible door mountings Fast and simple assembly (thanks to integrated positioning aids) Adaptable off-centre suspension during assembly (for subsequent alignment of the installed elevator car in the shaft)
www.liftequip.com
Efficiency Self-supporting elevator car without car sling with 1:1 suspension Compact and variable elevator car Largest possible available car floor area Elevator car configurable in millimetre increments Reliability Strict quality inspection ensures high quality of all installed components Guarantee of the long term supply of spare parts Reduced down times and faults
Variability From the basic model (galvanised elevator car) to individual full equipment specification – everything is possible Large number of interfaces (e.g. doors of different manufacturers) Different materials possible Environment Energy-efficient production with cuttingedge manufacturing technologies Use of recyclable materials Optimised use of materials Energy-saving LED lighting
191
LEMoS®
LEMoS®
Space optimisation
Budget optimisation 'Step by Step' modernisation
Older elevator installations frequently have smaller car dimensions which fail to meet today's demands for comfort and legal requirements. In existing buildings you cannot however, change the shaft dimensions.
Scope of modernisation (degree of modernisation)
Modernisation of all required components in one step
Depending on scope, the modernisation of your elevator installation may represent a larger investment. If you prefer to spread these costs over several budget periods or years, we can prepare a modernisation plan work within your budget. This takes into account both the technical necessities as well as your budget.
With the LEMoS system, we offer you the unique possibility to make better use of the existing shaft and use the largest possible elevator car. The new, self-supporting elevator car has a compact, load-bearing structure and can be adjusted to fit the existing shaft in millimetre increments. In addition, spaceoptimised shaft equipment and doors with reduced depth can be used.
Modernisation – Optimised to your Requirements
All measures serve to offer the passengers a more spacious elevator car and to improve the handling capacity of the installation. Older people and people with disabilities will, in particular, be very much appreciate the additional freedom of movement.
With the flexible LEMoS system you can if you wish naturally use your existing elevator car or retain the car dimensions.
The modernisation of individual components then takes place over a longer period of time, spread over several stages. The down time is, of course, kept to a minimum during the work. Between the individual stages of the modernisation, you will always have available a safe and fully functional elevator installation.
Modernisation
Modernisation
Modernisation – Optimised to your Requirements
Modular modernisation of individual components spread over a longer period of time Period of time 1 (e.g. 1st year)
Period of time 2 Period of time 3 (e.g. 2nd year) (e.g. 3rd year)
The scope and features of the individual modernisation packets can be freely selected and can be adapted to the available budget. The matched LEMoS system
Time / budget periods
ensures that all components go together perfectly. When all measures have been completed, you get a modernised elevator that represents the latest state of the art equipment.
Cost optimisation Investment costs
In the development of the LEMoS system, we have placed special emphasis on the aspect of economic efficiency in modernisation. This applies both to the investment for the modernisation itself as well as to the ongoing running costs. The LEMoS components have such flexible interfaces that all parts which are exposed to little wear and do not need to be replaced, such are for example guide rails and counterweights. This reduces the modernisation costs as well as the installation time. Parts of the shaft equipment, landing doors or door frames can frequently be re used. The LEMoS components represent the latest state of the art equipment and manufacturing techniques. They are optimised for long service life and low power consumption.
192
Optimisation of the conversion time
Services provided by the customer for adapting to the requirements of a "less flexible" new installation
Reduction in investment costs
Modernisation as complete replacement of the entire installation
Demand-based component modernisation with LEMoS
During extensive modernisation, down times of your elevator installation cannot be completely avoided. With the LEMoS system, we can, however, keep this to a minimum with concern for the passengers. Parts of the system which are exposed to minimal wear or which would require considerable time to replace, such as the shaft equipment (rails, bracket, counterweight), can be integrated in your modernised elevator and continue to be used due to the high flexibility of the components. Compared to a complete replacement, this eliminates time-intensive and costly measures. In addition, with the modular LEMoS system, we can prepare a phased modernisation schedule for you in which the modernisation measures are performed during times of low use.
The ongoing operating expenses are significantly reduced.
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
Demand-based, modular modernisation with LEMoS
Conversion time = down time
Conversion time = down time
Modernisation as complete replacement of the entire installation
Time
A shortened conversion time and fewer measures performed by the customer also reduce stress for the building tenants caused by noise and dirt. Less additional work is necessary for adapting the doors on the landing.
193
LEMoS®
LEMoS®
Modernisation according to Individual Requirements
Control system
Landing and car door
- Our components are tested with all
- Reduction of door operating times - Increase in safety level - Designed to accommodate disabled
the control systems available on the market - Energy efficiency options such as standby and sleep mode can be activated in our components
Modernisation
Modernisation
Modernisation according to Individual Requirements
passengers by means of light grid - Increase in installation availability - Modern, attractive appearance
- Doors with different door mounting dimensions
Drive and control - Very smooth running - Reduction of operating costs
through energy savings
Elevator car
- Increase in safety level - Maximum efficiency
- Maximization of car dimensions
possible - Increase in the rated load possible - Modern, attractive design - Positive effect on image & increase in building value
- Energy recovery optional
Safety technology - Increase in the safety level to the
Lighting
current state of the art - Fulfilment of the obligations of the installation operator - Reliable increase in the availability of the installation
- Design possibilities through light
for a relaxing atmosphere - Energy- and cost-saving LED lighting - Integrable emergency light function - Long working life, considerably reduced maintenance expenses
Shaft equipment - Optimal utilisation of space in
Operating and indicator elements
the shaft - Larger dimensions of the elevator car possible - Flexible components, such as counterweight, rail bracket ... - Reduction of running noise
- The choice can be made with all
the elements combinable for the selected control system - Elderly- and disabled-friendly design in acc. with EN 81-70 Pictured: - with gearless drive in the machine room
194
Pictured: - with geared drive in the machine room
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
195
LEMoS®
LEMoS®
Rated load 320 kg ≤ Q ≤ 550 kg
Performance data and principal dimensions with side counterweight without dual entrance (rope suspension 1:1)
Shaft layout with side-opening door EC STM
01
CWD
R2 WC2 1)
SW
FFL ORF
TH
WC3 SD WC2 1)
Min. SP = 1150 mm
Machine room CW/2+CWD/2+85 mm
R1 - door recess, left R2 - door recess, right 1) The larger value is valid. F or the values C1 and C2 see table on Pages 17/18. Pictured load points in the machine room for gearless drive.
CW/2+60mm
425
450
500
550
1.0 40
25 No
4
(in 1 mm
Min. CW
[mm]
steps)
Max. CW
[mm]
(in 1 mm
Min. CD
[mm]
steps)
5
6
7
800 850
900
950
850 1000
1100
1150
1250
1350
1450
1500
1550
1650
1050
Max. CD
[mm]
CH
[mm]
2000 – 2250 (min. CH = DH; max. CH = DH + 150 mm)
Side wall clearance, side GG
WC1
[mm]
225 (for counterweight depth 100 mm)
WC2
[mm]
Min. SW 2
[mm]
1100
1200
1300
1350
140 – 300 1165 1375
1425
1475
1215 1525
1625
1675
Door packet thickness
Min. WC3 3 [mm] DD [mm]
Shaft depth
Min. SD
[mm]
Max. SD
[mm]
Headroom height
Min. HR
[mm]
3320 – 3570 (Min. HR = CH + 1320 mm)
Pit depth
Min. SP
[mm]
1150 / 1550 4
Clearance - rail bracket
Max. l
[mm]
1775
1875
70 155 – 295 (depending on door model and door type, see Pages 17/18) 1300 1490
1590
2500
1690
2450
1740
2400
1840
2200
1890
1940
2040
2150
2100
2000
2000
38.5
39.9
40.9
43.0
48.4
20.8
21.5
22.1
23.2
26.1
13.7
14.1
16.0
17.4
43.1
44.8
52.3
58.7
36.4
36.9
39.4
44.1
Distance between elevator car guide rails EC STM
[mm]
Rope clearance dimension
RCD
[mm]
Load point in machine room
PGG
[kN]
35.7
36.8
37.5
Load point in machine room
PEC
[kN]
19.2
19.9
20.3
Installation eye in machine room
E1
[kN]
Load point in the shaft pit
P7
[kN]
13.1
13.6
13.9
14.3
Load point in the shaft pit
P8
[kN]
40.5
42.2
43.8
45.3
Load point in the shaft pit
P9
[kN]
32.3
33.4
34.1
34.9
CW + 40 variable
5.0
Car width
=
Shaft width
–
Wall clearance, left
–
CW
=
SW
–
WC1
–
WC2
CW
=
SW
–
(C1 - R1 + IT + "air")
–
(C2 - R2 + IT + "air")
CW
= =
SW SW
– –
(C1 - R1 + 25 mm + 10 mm) 225 mm
– –
(C2 - R2 + 25 mm + 10 mm) 140 mm
dia. 200
Ge
arl
es
s/
Wall clearance, right
dia. 80
Car width
=
Car gauge between rails
–
2 x distance from elevator car to rail
dia. 80
CW
=
CGBR
–
2 x 20 mm
SD
PGG
P7 SD
196
R dia. 200 CD
Ge
are
d
MRD = SD+600 mm
P9
196
Middle elevator car
160-200 200
CW STM / 2 +145 mm
Shaft pit
SW
400
Car height
Max. CW
P8
375
Determination of the maximum possible car dimensions with side counterweight (rope suspension 1:1)
SW
P7
350
1) The rated load depends on the car dimensions and on the installed car door. To determine the actual rated load, see table "Rated load depending on car width and car depth" on Page 15. 2) The values for the lateral wall clearances WC1/WC2 and the resulting shaft widths have unrestricted validity only if the existing doors are retained. As soon as new doors are installed, the permissible values for the shaft width must be determined depending on the door model, the door type and the door width. See table "Dimensions of the landing doors for project planning" on Pages 17/18. 3) The horizontal, free clearance between outer edge of the elevator car and shaft rear wall must be at least 50 mm (including installation tolerances). The specified dimension also contains the installation depth of the wall panels of 20 mm, because it is referred to the car inner side. 4) The minimum pit depth is 1550 mm for CW x CD = 800 x 1100 - 1200 mm and for CW x CD = 850 x 1150 - 1200 mm.
CD R2
CW
[m]
Rear wall clearance
FFL ORF
DD DW
TH
320
Max. SW 2 [mm]
CW STM
R1
Max. travel height
Shaft width
EC STM
WC1 1)
[m/s]
Car depth
Shaft layout with centre-opening door CWD
[kg]
v
Car width
Min. HR = CH + 1320 mm
DW CW
CH = 2000 – 2250 mm
R1 WC1 1)
TH = 2000 – 2100 mm
DD
CD
Gearless / Geared
Q
Speed
Number of passengers
SD
1
Rated load 1
Dual entrance
Min. MRH = 2000 mm
CW STM
WC3
Modernisation
Rated load 320 kg ≤ Q ≤ 550 kg
Project Planning and Performance Data (side counterweight) Modernisation
Project Planning and Performance Data (side counterweight)
PEC
Without dual entrance Car depth
=
CD CD
= =
Max. CD
=
Shaft depth – Door packet thickness – – – DD SD
Rear wall clearance WC3
– Installation tolerance, door side – IT
SD
–
(155 to 295 mm)
–
70 mm
–
25 mm
SD
–
155 mm
–
70 mm
–
25 mm
IT – installation tolerance (± 25 mm); C1 / C2 – door dimensions, space requirements of the door panels in shaft width; R1 – door recess, left; R2 – door recess, right; installation tolerances of ± 25 mm each are included in wall clearance dimensions WC1, WC2 and WC3. SW MRW = SW+800 mm
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
197
LEMoS®
LEMoS®
Rated load 630 kg ≤ Q ≤ 1050 kg
Performance data and principal dimensions with side counterweight without / with dual entrance (rope suspension 1:1) Shaft layout with side-opening door R3
DW2 1)
(WC1)
R4 (WC2)
1)
01
DD2
Gearless / Geared
DW1 1)
WC1
SW
R2 WC2
CW
1)
SW FFL ORF
Shaft layout with centre-opening door DW2
R3 (WC1) 1)
EC STM
DH = 2000 – 2100 mm
WC2
1)
CH = 2000 – 2250 mm
DD1 R1
R2
CW
WC1
SD
CD
CW STM
CD
SD
DD DW 1)
Min. HR = CH + 1320 mm
CW STM
CWD EC STM
R1
Min. MRH = 2000 mm
GGT
WC3
CWD
Rated load 1 Speed Max. travel height Dual entrance Number of passengers (in 1 mm Car width steps) (in 1 mm Car depth
EC STM Bracket support
Modernisation
Rated load 630 kg ≤ Q ≤ 1050 kg
Project Planning and Performance Data (side counterweight) Modernisation
Project Planning and Performance Data (side counterweight)
R4 (WC2) 1)
ORF FFL
CW
WC1
1)
DW1
R2
CW
WC2 1)
Machine room
SW
SW
0 mm (with bracket support) CW STM / 2 +145 mm
Shaft pit
P7
P7
P8
SW
SD
P9
750
8
Min. CW Max. CW Min. CD Max. CD steps) CH Car height WC1 Side wall clearance, side GG WC2 Min. SW 3 Shaft width Max. SW 3 Rear wall clearance Min. WC3 4 Door packet thickness DD Shaft depth (without dual entrance) Min. SD (without dual entrance) Max. SD (with dual entrance) Max. SD Headroom height Min. HR Min. SP Pit depth Max. l Clearance - rail bracket Distance between elevator car guide rails EC STM Rope clearance dimension RCD PGG Load point in machine room PEC Load point in machine room Installation eye in machine room E1 P7 Load point in the shaft pit P8 Load point in the shaft pit P9 Load point in the shaft pit
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
10 900
1500 1050 1750
1.0 40 possible Yes/No 11
900
1000
1050
12 1000 1600 1300
13
Yes 14 1100
1150 1200 1450 2000 2100 2000 – 2250 (min. CH = DH; max. CH = DH + 150 mm) 255 (without bracket support); 330 (with bracket support) 2 140 – 300 1295 1395 1495 2230 70 (without dual entrance) 155 – 295 (depending on door model and door type, see Pages 17/18) 1400 1450 1550 1700 2390 2490 2640 2740 3320 – 3570 (min. HR = CH + 1320 mm) 1150 2750 2500 2200 CW + 40 variable 68.2 70.9 73.6 77.4 on request 36.7 38.2 39.7 41.7 on request 10.0 25.5 26.5 27.5 29.0 30.5 81.5 86.0 90.5 97.0 101.5 62.5 65.5 68.0 69.0 72.5
2130
1300 2140 2390
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN]
825
63.9 34.4 24.0 75.0 59.0
1) The rated load depends on the car dimensions and on the installed car door. To determine the actual rated load, see table "Rated load depending on car width and car depth" on Pages 15/16. 2) Without dual entrance: WC1 = 255 mm (without bracket support) with min. CD >= 1520 mm, otherwise WC1 = 330 mm (with bracket support). With dual entrance: WC1 = 255 mm (without bracket support) with min. CD >= 1680 mm, otherwise WC1 = 330 mm (with bracket support). 3) The values for the lateral wall clearances WC1/WC2 and the resulting shaft widths have unrestricted validity only if the existing doors are retained. As soon as new doors are installed, the permissible values for the shaft width must be determined depending on the door model, the door type and the door width. See table "Dimensions of the landing doors for project planning" on Pages 17/18. 4) The horizontal, free clearance between outer edge of the elevator car and shaft rear wall must be at least 50 mm (including installation tolerances). The specified dimension also contains the installation depth of the wall panels of 20 mm, because it is referred to the car inner side.
Determination of the maximum possible car dimensions with side counterweight (rope suspension 1:1)
Prerequisites for version with dual entrance: Door recess dimension R1 or R2 >= 90 mm on main entrance side and R3 or R4 >= 90 mm on rear side; dual entrance is not otherwise possible. R1 - door recess, left R2 - door recess, right 1) The larger value is valid. F or the values C1 and C2 see table on Pages 17/18. Pictured load points in the machine room for gearless drive.
CW/2 + CWD/2 + 160 mm (with bracket support) CW/2 + CWD/2 + 85 mm Middle elevator car
R dia. 200 CD
CW/2+60mm dia. 80
PGG dia. 200
Ge
arl
dia. 80
es
s/
Ge
are
d
MRD = SD+600 mm
R1
R2 WC2 1)
SD
DW
WC1 1)
160-200 200
DD
DD1
CWD
R1
TH Min. SP = 1150 mm
FFL ORF
DH = 2000 – 2100 mm
SD
SD
CD
CD
CW STM
CW STM
EC STM
DH = 2000 – 2100 mm
DD2
WC3
CWD
630
[kg] [m/s] [m]
Q v TH
Car width CW CW CW Max. CW
= = = = =
Car width CW
= =
Shaft width SW SW SW SW
– – – – –
Wall clearance, left WC1 (C1 - R1 + IT + "air") (C1 - R1 + 25 mm + 10 mm) 255 mm – –
Car gauge between rails CGBR
Without dual entrance = Shaft depth Car depth = CD SD = CD SD = Max. CD SD
– – – –
Door packet thickness DD (155 to 295 mm) 155 mm
– – – –
Car depth CD CD Max. CD
SW
= = = =
Shaft depth SD SD SD
– – – –
Wall clearance, right WC2 (C2 - R2 + IT + "Luft") (C2 - R2 + 25 mm + 10 mm) 140 mm
2 x distance from elevator car to rail 2 x 20 mm
Rear wall clearance WC3 70 mm 70 mm
With dual entrance
PEC
– – – – –
Thickness of door packet (1st entrance) DD (1st entrance) (155 to 295 mm) 155 mm
– Installation tolerance, door side – IT – 25 mm – 25 mm
IT – installation tolerance (± 25 mm); C1 / C2 – door dimensions, space requirements of the door panels in shaft width; R1 – door recess, left; R2 – door recess, right; installation tolerances of ± 25 mm each are included in wall clearance dimensions WC1, WC2 and WC3.
– Thickness of door packet (2nd entrance) – DD (2nd entrance) – (155 to 295 mm) – 155 mm
– – – –
2 x installation tolerance, door sides 2 x IT 2 x 25 mm 50 mm
MRW = SW+800 mm
199 198
198
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
199
LEMoS®
LEMoS®
Project Planning and Performance Data (rear counterweight)
Project Planning and Performance Data (rear counterweight)
Shaft layout with side-opening door
Performance data and principal dimensions with rear counterweight without dual entrance (rope suspension 1.1)
Min. MRH = 2000 mm
WC3
Gearless / Geared
Rated load 320 kg ≤ Q ≤ 550 kg
Rated load 1
Q
[kg]
Speed
v
[m/s]
Max. travel height
TH
[m]
CW
WC2 1)
FFL ORF
SW
WC3
TH
EC STM CW STM
450
500
550 25
4
(in 1 mm
Min. CW
[mm]
steps)
Max. CW
[mm]
(in 1 mm
Min. CD
[mm]
steps)
Max. CD
[mm]
Car height
CH
[mm]
Side wall clearance, side GG
WC1/WC2 [mm]
Shaft width
Min. SW 2
5
6
7
800 1050
1100
1200
850 1300
1350
1400
850 1100
1200
1300
950
1350
1450
1500
1550
1650
2000 – 2250 (min. CH = DH; max. CH = DH + 150 mm) 140 – 300 1080
[mm] 1650
1700
1800
1130 1900
1950
2000
Rear wall clearance
WC3 3
[mm]
225 (for counterweight 100 mm)
Door packet thickness
DD
[mm]
Shaft depth
Min. SD
[mm]
155 – 295 (depending on door model and door type, see Pages 17/18) 1255 4
Max. SD
[mm]
Headroom height
Min. HR
[mm]
Pit depth
Min. SP
[mm]
Clearance - rail bracket
Max. l
[mm]
1645
1745
1845
1895
1945
2045
1355
2095
2195
3320 – 3570 (min. HR = CH + 1320 mm) 1150 / 1550 5 2500
2450
2400
2200
2150
2100
2000
2000
38.5
39.9
40.9
43.0
48.4
20.8
21.5
22.1
23.2
26.1
13.7
14.1
16.0
17.4
43.1
44.8
52.3
58.7
36.4
36.9
39.4
44.1
Distance between elevator car guide rails EC STM
[mm]
Rope clearance dimension
RCD
[mm]
Load point in machine room
PGG
[kN]
35.7
36.8
37.5
Load point in machine room
PEC
[kN]
19.2
19.9
20.3
Installation eye in machine room
E1
[kN]
Load point in the shaft pit
P7
[kN]
13.1
13.6
13.9
14.3
Load point in the shaft pit
P8
[kN]
40.5
42.2
43.8
45.3
Load point in the shaft pit
P9
[kN]
32.3
33.4
34.1
34.9
CW + 40 variable
5.0
1) The rated load depends on the car dimensions and on the installed car door. To determine the actual rated load, see table "Rated load depending on car width and car depth" on Page 15. 2) The values for the lateral wall clearances WC1/WC2 and the resulting shaft widths have unrestricted validity only if the existing doors are retained. As soon as new doors are installed, the permissible values for the shaft width must be determined depending on the door model, the door type and the door width. See table "Dimensions of the landing doors for project planning" on Pages 17/18. 3) The horizontal, free clearance between outer edge of the elevator car and outer edge of the counterweight must be at least 50 mm (including installation tolerances). The specified dimension also contains the installation depth of the wall panels of 20 mm, because it is referred to the car inner side. 4) Smaller shaft depths are possible on request and after the project planning has been technically reviewed. 5) The minimum pit depth is 1550 mm for CW x CD = 800 x 1100 - 1200 mm and for CD = 850 to 950 mm.
OFF ORF
DD
Min. SP = 1150 mm
SD
CD
425
40
Max. SW 2 [mm]
Shaft layout with centre-opening door
CWD
400
No
Car width
MIN. HR. = CH + 1320 mm
CH = 2000 – 2250 mm
DH = 2000 – 2100 mm
WC11)
R2
375
1.0
Number of passengers
SD
CD DD DW
350
Dual entrance
Car depth
R1
320
Modernisation
01
EC STM CW STM
CWD
Modernisation
Rated load 320 kg ≤ Q ≤ 550 kg
R1 WC11)
DW CW SW
R2 WC21)
Determination of the maximum possible car dimensions with rear counterweight (rope suspension 1:1)
Machine room dia. 200
Shaft pit
dia. 200
P9
PEC
P7
P8
SW
200
Gearless / Geared
SD
P7
dia. 80
160-200 200
dia. 80 CW/2+60 mm
SD MRD = SD+500 mm
RCD
PGG
Car width
=
Shaft width
–
Wall clearance, left
–
CW
=
SW
–
WC1
–
WC2
CW
=
SW
–
(C1 - R1 + IT + "air")
–
(C2 - R2 + IT + "air")
CW
= =
SW
Max. CW
SW
– –
Car width
=
Car gauge between rails
–
2 x distance from elevator car to rail
CW
=
CGBR
–
2 x 20 mm
CD =
=
(C2 - R2 + 25 mm + 10 mm) 140 mm
Without dual entrance Car depth
R1 - door recess, left R2 - door recess, right 1) The larger value is valid. F or the values C1 and C2 see table on Pages 17/18. Pictured load points in the machine room for gearless drive.
(C1 - R1 + 25 mm + 10 mm) – 140 mm –
Wall clearance, right
CD Max. CD
= Shaft depth = SD = SD
– Door packet thickness – – – DD –
(155 to 295 mm)
–
225 mm
–
25 mm
=
–
155 mm
–
225 mm
–
25 mm
SD
Rear wall clearance WC3
– Installation tolerance, door side – IT
IT – installation tolerance (± 25 mm); C1 / C2 – door dimensions, space requirements of the door panels in shaft width; R1 – door recess, left; R2 – door recess, right; installation tolerances of ± 25 mm each are included in wall clearance dimensions WC1, WC2 and WC3.
SW MRW = SW+550 mm
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
201
LEMoS®
LEMoS®
Project Planning Data (without dual entrance)
Performance data and principal dimensions with rear counterweight without dual entrance (rope suspension 1.1) 630
[kg] [m/s] [m]
Q v TH
Rated load 1 Speed Max. travel height Dual entrance Number of passengers (in 1 mm Car width steps) (in 1 mm Car depth
750
8
Min. CW Max. CW Min. CD Max. CD steps) Car height CH Side wall clearance, side GG WC1 WC2 Shaft width Min. SW 2 Max. SW 2 Rear wall clearance WC3 3 Door packet thickness DD Shaft depth Min. SD Max. SD Headroom height Min. HR Min. SP Pit depth Max. l Clearance - rail bracket Distance between elevator car guide rails EC STM Rope clearance dimension RCD PGG Load point in machine room PEC Load point in machine room Installation eye in machine room E1 P7 Load point in the shaft pit P8 Load point in the shaft pit P9 Load point in the shaft pit
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN] [kN]
825 1.0 40 No 11
10 900
1500 1050 1750
900
Rated load depending on car width and car depth 1000
12 1000
13 1100
63.9 34.4 24.0 75.0 59.0
1380
1885
77.4 41.7 29.0 97.0 69.0
Determination of the maximum possible car dimensions with rear counterweight (rope suspension 1:1) =
Shaft width
–
Wall clearance, left
–
Wall clearance, right
CW
=
SW
–
WC1
–
WC2
CW
=
SW
–
(C1 - R1 + IT + "air")
–
(C2 - R2 + IT + "air")
CW
= =
SW
– –
(C1 - R1 + 25 mm + 10 mm) 140 mm
– –
(C2 - R2 + 25 mm + 10 mm) 140 mm
SW
950
1450
The rated load depends on the car dimensions and on the installed car door. To determine the actual rated load, see table "Rated load depending on car width and car depth" on Page 15. 2) The values for the lateral wall clearances WC1/WC2 and the resulting shaft widths have unrestricted validity only if the existing doors are retained. As soon as new doors are installed, the permissible values for the shaft width must be determined depending on the door model, the door type and the door width. See table "Dimensions of the landing doors for project planning" on Pages 17/18. 3) The horizontal, free clearance between outer edge of the elevator car and outer edge of the counterweight must be at least 50 mm (including installation tolerances). The specified dimension also contains the installation depth of the wall panels of 20 mm, because it is referred to the car inner side.
Car width
=
Car gauge between rails
–
2 x distance from elevator car to rail
CW
=
CGBR
–
2 x 20 mm
950
1000
1050
1100
1150
1200
1250
1300
1350
1400
1450
1500
1550
1600
320
350
350
375
375
400
425
425
450
475
500
500
525
350
350
375
400
400
425
450
450
475
500
525
550
575
320
350
350
375
400
425
425
450
475
500
525
550
575
600
600
320
350
350
375
400
425
425
450
475
500
525
550
575
600
630
650
1050
320
350
350
375
400
425
425
450
475
500
525
550
575
630
630
675
700
1100
320
350
375
400
425
425
475
475
500
550
575
600
630
650
675
700
725
1150
350
375
400
425
425
450
475
525
550
575
600
630
650
675
725
750
775
1200
350
375
400
425
450
475
500
550
575
600
630
650
700
725
750
775
800
1250
375
400
425
450
475
500
550
575
600
630
675
700
725
750
800
825
850
1300
400
425
450
475
500
525
575
600
630
675
700
725
750
800
825
850
900
1350
400
425
450
500
525
550
600
630
650
700
725
775
800
825
875
900
925
1400
425
450
475
525
550
575
630
650
700
725
750
800
825
875
900
925
975
1450
425
475
500
550
575
630
650
675
725
750
800
825
875
900
950
975
1000
1500
450
475
525
575
600
630
675
725
750
800
825
875
900
950
975
1550
475
500
550
600
630
675
700
750
775
825
850
900
925
975
1600
475
525
575
600
650
700
725
775
800
850
900
925
975
1000
1650
500
550
600
630
675
725
750
800
850
875
925
975
1000
1700
525
575
630
650
700
750
775
825
875
925
950
1000
1750
550
600
630
675
725
775
825
850
900
950
1000
1800
575
600
650
700
750
800
850
875
925
975
1850
575
630
675
725
775
825
875
925
950
1000
1900
600
650
700
750
800
850
900
850
1000
1950
630
675
725
775
825
875
925
975
2000
650
700
750
800
850
900
950
1000
2050
675
725
775
825
875
925
975
2100
675
750
800
850
900
950
1000
Determination of the rated loads in accordance with DIN EN 81-20, edition 06.2010, item 8.2.1, table 1.1 for passenger elevators, with consideration given to an available area in the entrance area with closed door of 0.072 m2 (door model ThyssenKrupp K8A, door type M2T / dual panel, one-sided telescoping, side-opening, door width DW = 900 mm). When using other door models and door types, rated loads may vary from these values.
Number of persons depending on rated load Q Rated loads
Q
[kg]
100
180
225
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
[m2]
0.28
0.49
0.60
0.79
0.98
1.17
1.31
[kg]
630
675
750
825
900
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1.45
1.59
1.73
1.87
2.01
2.15
2.29
Number of persons Min. available area in elevator car Rated loads
Q
Number of persons Min. available area in elevator car
Car width
900
320
1000
1150 1200 1300 2000 2100 2000 – 2250 (min. CH = DH; max. CH = DH + 150 mm) 255 (without bracket support); 330 (with bracket support) 2 140 – 300 1180 1280 2200 255 (for counterweight 135 mm) 155 – 295 (depending on door model and door type, see Pages 17/18) 1585 1635 1735 2575 2675 3320 – 3570 (min. HR = CH + 1320 mm) 1150 2750 2500 CW + 40 variable 68.2 70.9 73.6 36.7 38.2 39.7 10.0 25.5 26.5 27.5 81.5 86.0 90.5 62.5 65.5 68.0
1485 2325
850
900
1600
2100
Car width CW [mm] 800
850
1)
Max. CW
Rated loads Q [kg]
Car depth CD [mm]
Modernisation
Rated load 630 kg ≤ Q ≤ 1000 kg
Modernisation
Project Planning and Performance Data (rear counterweight)
[m2]
320
800
350
375
400
425
975
1000
450
500
525
1050
Determination of the number of persons in accordance with DIN EN 81-1:1998+A3:2009, edition 06.2010, item 8.2.3 (person weight 75 kg) or table 1.2.
Without dual entrance Car depth
=
CD CD
= =
Max. CD
=
Shaft depth – Door packet thickness – – – DD SD
Rear wall clearance WC3
– Installation tolerance, door side – IT
SD
–
(155 to 295 mm)
–
255 mm
–
25 mm
SD
–
155 mm
–
255 mm
–
25 mm
IT – installation tolerance (± 25 mm); C1 / C2 – door dimensions, space requirements of the door panels in shaft width; R1 – door recess, left; R2 – door recess, right; installation tolerances of ± 25 mm each are included in wall clearance dimensions WC1, WC2 and WC3.
202
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
203
LEMoS®
LEMoS®
Project Planning Data (door mountings)
Rated load depending on car width and car depth 850
900
950
1000
1050
1100
1150
1200
1250
1300
1350
1400
1450
1500
1550
1600
series
900 Special advantages 575
600
630
630
675
700
575
600
630
650
675
700
725
575
600
630
650
700
725
750
775
1050 1100 1150
575
600
630
675
700
725
750
775
800
575
600
630
675
700
725
750
800
825
850
575
600
630
675
700
725
775
800
825
850
900 925
1200 1250 1300
575
600
630
675
700
725
775
800
825
875
900
1350
575
600
630
675
700
725
775
800
825
875
900
950
975
1400
600
630
650
700
725
775
800
825
875
900
950
975
1000
575
630
650
700
725
750
800
825
875
900
950
975
1025
1050
600
630
675
725
750
800
825
875
900
950
975
1025
1050
1050
1450 575
1550
600
630
675
700
750
775
825
850
900
950
975
1025
1600
600
650
700
725
775
800
850
900
925
975
1000
1050
1650
630
675
725
750
800
850
875
925
975
975
1050
1700
650
700
750
775
825
875
900
950
1000
1050
1750
675
725
775
800
850
900
950
975
1025
1800
700
750
800
825
875
925
975
1025
1050
1850
725
775
825
875
900
950
1000
1050
1900
750
800
850
900
925
975
1025
1950
775
825
875
925
975
1025
2000
800
850
900
950
1000
1050
2050
825
875
925
975
1025
2100
825
900
950
1000
1050
- Compact dimensions: low installation depth and width, ideal for narrow shafts
- Further usage of existing swing landing
challenging application conditions
- Version with asymmetric entrance
doors possible
offers additional planning freedom
- Extensive range of fire protection
- Further usage of existing swing landing
certifications and many options
doors possible
Dimensions of the landing doors for project planning
C1
C1
TB
Door type M2T (dual panel, one-sided telescoping, left-opening)
S8A / K8A
1050
M2T (dual panel, one-sided telescoping, right-opening)
Door width DW [mm]
C2
Dimensioned drawing for centre-opening door (dual panel version shown)
Space requirement of door panels (in shaft width) C 1 [mm]
700
400
750
425
800
450
850
475
900
500
M4TZ (quadruple panel, telescoping, centre-opening)
E1
TB
WA1 C-E1
KB SB
E2 WA2 150 C-E2
400 425 150
700
Door packet thickness DD [mm]
450
1)
295 (incl. door frame)
295 (incl. door frame)
475
900
S8A / K8A
1)
750
850
M2Z (dual panel, centre-opening)
C 2 [mm]
700
800
S8A / K8A
S8A / K8A
TB
C2
Dimensioned drawing for side-opening door (left-opening version shown)
Door model
Determination of the rated loads in accordance with DIN EN 81-1:1998+A3:2009, edition 06.2010, item 8.2.1, table 1.1 for passenger elevators, with consideration given to an available area in the entrance area with closed door of 0.072 m2 (door model ThyssenKrupp K8A, door type M2T / dual panel, one-sided telescoping, side-opening, door width DW = 900 mm). When using other door models and door types, rated loads may vary from these values.
- Economical solution for many common
TT
1000
FINELINE
applications
- Robust and reliable, even under
950
Car depth CD [mm]
2000 C-MOD
- High-quality, elegant and efficient door
850
1500
S8A / K8A
Door model
Car width CW [mm] 800
TT
Rated loads Q [kg]
Decision-making aid for selecting a suitable door model
TT
Modernisation
Project Planning Data (with dual entrance)
500 400
400
750
425
425
800
450
450
850
475
475
900
500
500
800
250
250
850
265
265
900
275
275
235 (incl. door frame)
295 (incl. door frame)
For dimensions C1 and C2 and for the dimension of door packet thickness TT, no shaft and dimensional tolerances are included in the calculation. To determine the maximum car width and maximum car depth in an existing elevator shaft, the space requirements of the doors must be taken into consideration. Listed in the above table are the values for C1, C2 and DD for the various door models and door types. Further door designs possible on request.
204
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
205
LEMoS®
LEMoS®
Technical Data
Dimensions of the landing doors for project planning Door model
Door type 2L (dual panel, one-sided telescoping, left-opening)
2000 C-MOD
2R (dual panel, one-sided telescoping, right-opening) 2000 C-MOD
2000 C-MOD
4S (quadruple panel, telescoping centre-opening, symmetric) FINELINE
FINELINE
Rated load Speed
Q
[kg]
v
[m/s]
390
Max. travel height
Max. TH
[m]
700
415
750
440
Dual entrance Mass of car (P 450 SV)
800
465
850
490
900
515
Door width DW [mm] 650
4/AS-L (quadruple panel, telescoping centre-opening, asymmetric left)
FINELINE
C 1 [mm]
C 2 [mm]
100
390
700
415
750
100
440 465
850
490
900
515
650
210 (DH 2000) / 235 (DH 2100) 210 (DH 2000) / 235 (DH 2100)
700
210 (DH 2000) / 235 (DH 2100) 210 (DH 2000) / 235 (DH 2100)
750
225
225
800
235
235
850
250
250
900
260
260
650
205
205
700
205
205
750
215
215
800
230
230
850
240
240
900
255
255
650
255
700
260
750
290
800
310
850
340
900 4/AS-R (quadruple panel, telescoping centre-opening, asymmetric right)
Space requirement of door panels (in shaft width)
650
800
4Z (quadruple panel, telescoping centre-opening)
Technical data, installed components and electrical data
145
255
700
260
800
DD [mm]
230 (not including depth of the door frame)
230 (not including depth of the door frame)
230 (not including depth of the door frame)
145
290 310
850
340
900
360
320
350
375
400
155 (not including depth of the door frame)
155 (not including depth of the door frame)
155 (not including depth of the door frame)
450
500
550
430 – 580
435 – 590
450 – 610
475 – 725
40 No
EC 1
[kg]
400 – 540
410 – 550
415 – 555
420 – 560
TW 45 C
Geared
Nominal power
[kW]
2.7
2.9
3.0
3.2
3.4
3.6
3.9
4.3
Max. mains power 2, 3
[kVA]
6.4
6.7
7.0
7.3
7.6
7.9
8.6
9.4
Mains rated current 2, 3
[A]
5.1
5.5
5.8
6.1
6.5
6.8
7.6
8.3
Max. mains current 2, 3
[A]
9.2
9.7
10.1
10.5
11.0
11.4
12.4
13.6
10 x 6
12 x 6
Diameter of traction sheave DT
[mm]
440
Suspension ropes
[mm]
7x8
n x dS
PMC 145-2 M
PMC 145-2 L
Nominal power
[kW]
2.38
3.69
Max. mains power 2, 3
[kVA]
4.1
6.3
Mains rated current 2, 3
[A]
4.1
6.6
Max. mains current 2, 3
[A]
5.9
Diameter of traction sheave DT
[mm]
Suspension ropes
[mm]
Drive
Gearless
n x dS
9.1 240
6x6
7x6
8x6 T 70/B
Elevator-car guide rails
T 50/A
Counterweight guides Elevator-car buffer
1 x 100x80 A
n x type
2 x 100x80 A 1 x 100x80 A
Rated load Speed
Q
[kg]
v
[m/s]
Max. travel height
Max. TH
[m]
Dual entrance Mass of car (P 1000 SV) Drive
EC 1
[kg]
630
750
825 1.0
1000
1050
630 – 1020
650 – 1050
Yes 700 – 1100
40 550 – 680
550 – 950
possible 590 – 980 610 – 1000
TW 45 C
Geared
900
TW 63 B
Nominal power
[kW]
4.8
4.8
5.3
5.8
6.7
7.4
7.7
Max. mains power 2, 3
[kVA]
10.2
12.3
13.6
14.6
15.6
16.7
17.4
Mains rated current 2, 3
[A]
9.3
9.4
10.3
11.2
12.9
14.2
14.9
Max. mains current 2, 3
[A]
14.7
17.7
19.6
21
22.5
24.1
25.1
Diameter of traction sheave DT
[mm]
440
Suspension ropes
[mm]
7x8
Drive
n x dS
590 5 x 10
510 6 x 10
7 x 10
PMC 145 M / PMC 170 M / DAF 210 L
Gearless
PMC 170 XL / DAF 270 M
Nominal power
[kW]
4.8
5.8
Max. mains power 2, 3
[kVA]
8.8
11.9
Mains rated current 2, 3
[A]
9.3
13.1
Max. mains current 2, 3
[A]
12.7
Diameter of traction sheave DT
[mm]
Suspension ropes
[mm]
n x dS
17.1 320
7x8
8x8 T 89/B
Elevator-car guide rails
T 50/A
Counterweight guides Elevator-car buffer Counterweight buffer n x type
Issue 09/2017
425 1.0
Counterweight buffer n x type
For dimensions C1 and C2 and for the dimension of door packet thickness, no shaft and dimensional tolerances are included in the calculation. To determine the maximum car width and maximum car depth in an existing elevator shaft, the space requirements of the doors must be taken into consideration. Listed in the above table are the values for C1, C2 and DD for the various door models and door types.
206
Drive
360
650
750
Door packet thickness
Modernisation
Modernisation
Project Planning Data (door mountings)
2 x 100x80 A
n x type 1 x 125x80 A
2 x 125x80 A 2 x 100x80 A
Equipment features for determining the elevator car weights: Min. EC: without dual entrance, door model FINELINE, hand-rail, without mirror, plastic flooring material, 2 mm. Max. EC: with dual entrance, door model K8A, hand-rail, mirror, plastic flooring material, 2 mm. 2) For 400 V / 50 Hz. 3) The specified powers and currents are average values for orientation, are based on the actually installed components and increase depending on the project according to elevator control unit, the number of landings, the type and number of operating and indicator elements, the car lighting and other electrical power consumers (e.g. fans).
1)
www.liftequip.com
207
LEMoS®
LEMoS®
Elevator Car Design
Colours / materials
Design variants VERTICAL A
VERTICAL B
VERTICAL C
Colours / materials WVSG
WVCW
Galvanised steel
Traffic White RAL 9016 / powder coating
WVSL
Leather / stainless steel
Colour RAL / powder coating
WVSF
Linen / stainless steel
Grain 220/stainless steel ferritic
WVSE
WVCC
Modernisation
Modernisation
Elevator Car Design
WVSA Grain 220/stainless steel austenitic
Car ceiling and lighting systems
Galvanised steel
Mirrors SpotLED Traffic white RAL 9016 / powder coating, CWFS stainless steel grain 220, CSFS
Half mirror BTHM
SlimLED Traffic white RAL 9016 / powder coating, CWSL stainless steel grain 220, CSSL
Traffic White / powder coating WVCW
Grain 220 stainless steel WVSF
WVCW
WVSF
CWFS
CWFS
CSSL
SBAA
SBAA
SBSS
without
FRKG
FRKB
without
HSRE + HSLT
HCIL
without
BTHM
BBWD
WVSG
Without lighting Traffic white RAL 9016 / powder coating, CWNL Wall
WVSG
Mirror, entire height BBWD
Car ceiling with lighting systems Flooring material
Skirt guard
FNES Black Stone / rubber
Kayar Grey / rubber
FRIC Ice / rubber
Dark Brushed Oak / PVC
Hand rail Mirrors
FOEO
FPDG Dove Grey / vinyl
FRKG
FRKB Kayar Black / rubber
Flooring material
Prepared for flooring material of up to 25 mm to be provided by customer
The elevator car can also be supplied in galvanised sheet metal as the design for customer lining. Please specify the customer-designed equipment with weight.
Hand rail Handrails
VERTICAL Stainless steel Grain 220 dia. 40 mm straight version Rear wall, side walls
Stainless steel Grain 220 dia. 40 mm bowed version Rear wall, side walls
Stainless steel Grain 220 dia. 40 mm bowed version, all round L-layout, U-layout
Skirt guards
Optional
208
Grain 220 stainless steel 50 mm SBSS
The elevator car is prepared for installation of a COP (car operating panel) as installation panel by the customer. On account of the selfsupporting construction no through-holes or openings may be provided in the walls (exception: cable lead-through).
Aluminium 30 mm SBAA
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
209
LEMoS®
LEMoS®
Lighting System
Elevator car P450SV / P1000SV design options
Code
Colours / materials
VERTICAL selection
Colours / materials
Code
Galvanised steel
WVSG
Half mirror from height of hand-rail to cover
BTHM
Traffic White RAL 9016 / powder coating
WVCW
Full height mirror without dots pattern
BBWD
Colour / RAL powder coating
WVCC
Leather / stainless steel
WVSE
Linen / stainless steel
WVSL
Grain 220 / stainless steel austenitic
LED Lighting Through the use of highly efficient and energy-saving LED lighting, energy savings up to 78% over fluorescent lamps can be achieved.
Mirror on the rear wall of the car
Walls (VERTICAL design line)
Grain 220 / stainless steel ferritic
VERTICAL selection
WVSF WVSA
Modernisation
Modernisation
Car Design Options
Handrails in the elevator car Stainless steel grain 220 l 40 mm version, straight on rear wall, rear
HSRE
on side wall, right
HSRI
on side wall, left
HSLT
Stainless steel grain 220 l 40 mm, bowed version on rear wall, rear
HBRE
on side wall, right
HBRI
on side wall, left
HBLT
Stainless steel grain 220 l 40 mm, bowed version, surrounding Car front walls Galvanised steel
DPSG
L-layout (on rear and side wall, opposite CIOP)
HCIL
U-layout (on three sides)
HCIU
Traffic White RAL 9016 / powder coating
DPCW
Colour / RAL powder coating
DPCC
Stainless steel grain 220 h = 50 mm SBSS without lighting
Leather / stainless steel
DPSE
Aluminium h = 30 mm without lighting
Linen / stainless steel
DPSL
Grain 220 / stainless steel ferritic
DPSF
Grain 220 / stainless steel austenitic
DPSA
W
White LED
Skirt guards in the elevator car
SBAA
W
Car ceiling and lighting SpotLED Traffic White RAL 9016 / powder coating
CWFS
SpotLED grain 220 / austenitic stainless steel
CSFS
SlimLED Traffic White RAL 9016 / powder coating
CWSL
SlimLED grain 220 / austenitic stainless steel
CSSL
Without lighting Traffic White RAL 9016 / powder coating
CWNL
LED strips With indirect lighting over the skirt guard, the LED lighting system offers you a special accent with soft light. Our atmospheric RGB LED lighting system offers you a broad spectrum of colored light.
Flooring material in the elevator car Kayar Black / rubber
FNES FRKB
Kayar Grey / rubber
FRKG
Ice / rubber
FRIC
Dove Grey / vinyl
FPDG
Dark Brushed Oak / PVC
FOEO
Black Stone / rubber
RGB LED: all colors available on the skirt guard
Without flooring material Option
210
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
211
Technical Report
Technical Report
Technical Report
Technical Report
Solutions for modernisation with components
Solutions for modernization with components The elevator markets in Germany and many parts of Europe have a high number of existing installations, some of which are more than 25 years old. Due to the considerable age of these installations and safety-related considerations, as well as the need for necessary repairs and conversions, many of these installations have to be fundamentally renovated. It may also be necessary to modernize existing elevators as part of building renovation programmes and changes of use. In such cases, the installation is often completely replaced. The market potential in terms of modernization is therefore significantly greater than for new installations which are either in planning or have already been fitted. The majority of these installations still have a machine room, which it would then be advisable to keep in service, even in the case of modernization. Modernizations which, without a compelling reason, forgo the continued use of an existing machine room, should therefore be carefully examined in order to check that measures in place for rescuing elevator passengers, maintenance and installation inspection are not encumbered as a result. Complete replacement with an MRL system is frequently proposed as a modernization solution when suppliers are not able to offer project-related and customized solutions.
UK
Whenever a modernization is planned, it is therefore necessary to check the current situation regarding the installation in terms of up-to-dateness, by using the available drawings and technical documents (register), and to document the actual status with photographs.
Bracket fastenings (masonry situation)
Modernization concepts, the selection of components and schedules must always be coordinated in detail.
Access to the building during the conversion
When installations are modernized, experience shows that noise behaviour in the building can change perceptibly in connection with changes made to the elevator.
…
It is therefore recommended that noise and passenger comfort should be measured before the conversion, in order for these measurements to then be used as comparison measurements after the modernization is completed. Because the total amount of time and resources required for modernization is not limited only to the elevator components, the surrounding area should also be included in the examination during the planning stage. The following general conditions should also be considered:
thicknesses and installation dimensions are also used, in many cases this optimization makes it is possible to use a door with a width of 900 mm and a floor area which fulfil the requirements for a type of elevator that can be used by the disabled. Door openings
Shaft openings (position and size)
When the existing door openings on the floors can continue to be used as a result of appropriate planning, this means a considerable reduction in the additional measures taken by the customer. Old hinged-door frames can be retained and the sliding doors placed behind them. By panelling the frames, the closure to the masonry on the floor can then be made dust-free.
Existing concrete foundations in machine room and pit (retain or remove) Dust-free conversion
Transport paths in the building for the conversion
This means that, in the area surrounding the modernization, it must be possible to adapt the solutions and packages flexibly to the particular application conditions of the installation.
Figure 6: DAF210 with adaptation to TW63 frame with rope guard
Figure 4: LIOP, LOP, LIP
verter is also state-of-the-art practice and energy-efficient solutions with power regeneration are used more frequently even in the lower range of performance. Machine base frames for adaptation to local conditions can also be supplied in many cases.
Some requirements that should be taken into consideration are detailed below. Some requirements may also arise in combination:
In terms of service and maintenance, both drive concepts are comparable, since brake manufacturers can alternatively also supply brakes with manual release for gearless brakes.
Optimization of the elevator car size With an elevator car that can be flexibly configured with integrated car sling for gauge reduction, the internal car area can be optimized, given the available shaft cross section. When doors with corresponding pad
Changes that affect structural aspects (ceiling loads, wall fastenings and pit stresses) Figure 3: Panelled hinged-door frame with telescopic door
Further usage of existing ceiling and wall openings
Operating and indicator elements On the landing, LOP, LIOP, LIP panels with integrated electrics for simple cabling to the control system can be fitted as desired on the door frame or the masonry as flat attachment elements with different button designs. The requirements of EN 81-70 are then also met.
Figure 1: Shaft utilisation
All solutions are designed with appropriate insulation for sound-optimized installation. When adjacent drives are replaced, solutions with a gearless system and traction sheave in the shaft are available, which are placed in the wall opening.
212
Figure 5: ModKit with PMC 170
Figure 8: DAF210 as a replacement for lower
Drum drive as a special solution Where space is very restricted, the solution with a drum drive is a possible alternative to the hydraulic or traction sheave elevator. EN 81-1 also describes the standard requirements for drum-drive elevators. Worm gears are generally used for the drive, while the use of gearless drives is limited in terms of rated load due to the required diameter of the traction sheave.
Figure 2: Elevator car with integrated car sling and flexible dimensions
48 46
Figure 7: DAF270 with adaptation to TW130 frame with rope guard
Gears can be placed either with an adapter onto the existing frame or onto the foundation. For using gearless drives in the machine room, corresponding solutions with an optional traction sheave cover are available.
Gearless or geared For the drive, a check must be made to see whether an existing gear with large traction sheave should be replaced by a gear with large traction sheave or whether a gearless system with 2:1 suspension and smaller traction sheave is used. In modernization, the use of a frequency con-
Techical Report - Solutions for modernisation with components
Techical Report - Solutions for modernisation with components
Solutions for modernisation with components
LIFT-REPORT
40. Jahrg. (2014)
LIFT-REPORT
40. Jahrg. (2014)
Heft 1
Heft 1
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
213
05.01.1970
3:27 Uhr
Technical Report
Seite 5
Technical report
Technical report
Techical Report - Solutions for modernisation with components
Solutions for modernisation with components
Installation part replacement When replacing parts, a check must be made to see whether components such as rails, brackets and the counterweight can, in fact, be used again. If they can, a considerable amount of installation time and effort, using dowels and transporting material, can be avoided. As a result, it may also be possible to reduce the length of time required for the conversion. Modular modernization
Figure 9: DAF270 with traction sheave in the shaft
Based on an overall concept for the modernization, it is possible to implement the measures in several steps, when this is not possible in one step for budgetary reasons, for example. It is then ensured that, on completion of the entire modernization, the installation features stateof-the-art technology and no unnecessary costs are incurred through repeatedly replacing components. Energy efficiency
Figure 10: Drum drive with gear TW130
LIFT-REPORT
214
40. Jahrg. (2014)
Heft 1
Depending of the type of use (number of runs, equipment, etc.), the focus must be placed on reducing either the travelling requirement or the standby requirement. In VDI 4707 Part 2, the process has now been defined as to how, using component characteristic values, an energy efficiency analysis can be carried out even as part of the modernization planning (forecast tool).
Solutions for modernisation with components
Structural aspects When the loads on an installation are increased, a change in or recalculation of the statics is always necessary. In many cases, one solution here can be to distribute the loading onto the shaft ceiling via a load distribution beam. This measure can also be helpful on occasions when, because of the installation situation, new ceiling openings have to be created. The drives are protected from vibration when placed on these beams. To further optimise the noise situation, it may be advisable in certain cases to also provide additional antivibrating elements underneath the beams. In this case, the rubber-metal connections should be designed accordingly. When individual components are replaced, all components to be changed and the different effects on the overall system during replacement must be assessed. UCM (unintended car movement) As part of a modernization operation, a check must always be made to see what measures must be implemented in relation to the requirements according to A3. Replacing a drive always makes it necessary to carry out an assessment according to EN 81-1:A3 (UCM) and implement the necessary measures. In this
case, comprehensive planning is required, which, in many cases, should be combined with simultaneous replacement of the control system, since the majority of control system developers offer A3 functionality as a pre-integrated feature in their current control systems. The solution is often easier to implement than networking the different components with additional detection systems. When a control system is later replaced, these components may no longer be required. When implementing the requirements of A3, it may be easier to forgo a levelling operation with earlyopening doors and demonstrate via rope elongation that, due to the buffering during loading, relevelling is not necessary. In this case, it is sufficient if the installation is securely stopped at the landing via a safety brake, as found on the gearless system in the form of an operational
brake, or via an emergency brake system (NBS) on the gear.
Summary In Germany and in parts of Europe, the market volume in terms of modernization is significantly greater than the market for new installations. Types of modernization may turn out to be very different according to the local situation and the particular supplier. Approaches to modernization range from the typical replacement of individual components to modular and scalable replacement solutions, through to the complete replacement of the entire elevator system. All these solution options should be viewed in terms of a project in order for a solution to be found, on the basis of a technical and economic assessment, that is customized to the requirements of both customer and operator.
In the process, flexibly adjusted car dimensions can be assessed for optimum space utilisation. In the report, the different concepts will also be assessed on the basis of examples, in order for a technical and economic assessment of the solution options to be made. In the view of the operators and in respect of safety for servicing personnel, continuing to use existing machine rooms is to be preferred, provided that this space is not otherwise required for reasons of building use (e.g addition).
Techical Report - Solutions for modernisation with components
Technical Report Anzeige_Liftronic_eco_1
In existing installations, headrooms and shaft pits are generally sufficiently large, so that measures for temporary safety spaces are not necessary. A special application where space is restricted may take the form of a solution with a drum drive. LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components GmbH, D-73765 Neuhausen a.d.F.
49
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
215
LED-Ceiling lighting
LED Spots / SlimLED PANEL Lightning
Own Notes ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
LED Spots / SlimLED Panel
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
218
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
216
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
217
LED-Ceiling lighting
LED-Ceiling lighting
The market wants energy-efficient lifts. Apart from the long service life of more than 50,000 operating hours and taking all considerations on the subject of energy efficiency into account, the conclusion is inescapable that greatest savings potential can be achieved in lift car lighting in standby mode with additional periods of disconnection. LED lighting with spotlights or a slim panel are practically standard in new lifts. During modernisation, the existing spotlights are easy to replace 1:1 with LED spotlights.
Depending on the car design, the lighting intensity may be sufficient to guarantee a brightness of 100 lux on the floor. In addition, LED lighting can be dimmed to ensure that the sensation of brightness is pleasant in relation to the fittings.
Lighting
Slim panels in different sizes and with an efficient installation concept for quick replacement are suitable as alternatives to existing lighting.
SlimLED PANEL 300 x 300 mm The power consumption is just 24 watts. In elevator cars up to a rated load of 1,600 kg, one SlimLED PANEL light suffices. For larger elevator cars, two or more SlimLED PANEL 300 x 300 lights can be used and grouped together or freely positioned on the ceiling.
SpotsLED
SlimLED PANEL 620 x 620 mm The power consumption is 46 watts. With this higher power, even larger elevator cars up to a rated load of 4,000 kg can be suffi-ciently and homogeneously illuminated with just one SlimLED PANEL light.
Emergency lighting with external power supply is possible as an option with slim panels.
SlimLED PANEL
SlimLED PANEL
Dimension 300 x 300 x 16 mm
Diemension 620 x 620 x 16 mm
Baseplate with numerous mounting options and adjustment ranges for precise alignment
620
LED lighting for modernisation too
LED Spots / SlimLED PANEL
300
Lighting
LED Spots / SlimLED PANEL
Car ceiling
20 300 620
16
SlimLED PANEL 300 x 300 mm
LED spotlights can be installed in the same arrangement as halogen spotlights in a suspended ceiling or directly in the car ceiling. The number of spotlights depends on the car size and design of the wall and floor surfaces. In 630 kg cars four spotlights are sufficient; in a 1000 kg car six spotlights provide adequate continuous illumination.
Technical Data Dimension Light exit area Diameter Aluminium frame Installation height Weight Materials Housing Cover plate
Union nut
Installation opening min. diameter 64 mm max. diameter 68 mm
Downlight housing
218
Lighting equipment Number of LEDs Power output per LED Energy efficiency category Colour temperature Lighting current Luminous efficiency Finebinning Colour rendering index (CRI) Viewing angle Intensity of current Operating voltage Power supply
9950 001 0871 50 mm, round 73 mm 12 mm 36 mm 180 g Aluminium, anodised, with integrated heat sink Clear polycarbonate and satinised, light-dispersing acrylic (PMMA) 3 Stück 1,8 Watt A
Power consumption 5,5 W Connection Halogen-free version Storage temperature - 10° to + 40° C Technical data of external lamp ballast Dimensions Width x Height x Depth 55,5 x 125,2 x 100 mm Connection values Input voltage 85 - 264 VAC Output voltage 12 VDC Power output 75 W Mains frequency range 47 - 63 Hz Certification Complying with all common EN standards Environmental conditions Temperature -10° to + 60° C Air humidity 20% - 90% (without condensation) Protection class IP 40
4 700° Kelvin 230 Lm 42 Im/W ± 250° K >80% 150° 550 mA 12 V Mains adapter 100 - 240V, 50 - 60 Hz
High energy efficiency class Issue 09/2017
Technical Data Dimension Light-emitting surface Frame width (aluminium) Dimensions WxDxH Weight Cable length
9950 001 1198 300 x 300 mm 260 x 260 mm
9950 001 1352 620 x 620 mm 580 x 580 mm 20 mm
300 x 300 x 16 mm 620 x 620 x 16 mm 1,2 kg 3,7 kg 6.000 mm
light – transformer (2-wire, halogen-free, open end, can be individually shortened)
Protection class
Materials Housing Cover screen
R
Dimensions in mm
3
Output power Mains frequency range Certifications Ambient temperature
Cable length
max. 50 W 50 / 60 Hz all common EN standards - 25° to + 45° C 2.000 mm
transformer – car distributor (3-wire, halogen-free, open end, can be individually shortened)
Protection class transformer
IP20
II / protective insulation Emergency light function via 12 V external voltage supply in the event power failure
Designed with step protection
aluminium, white wwhite polycarbonate, light diffusing acrylic (PMMA) galvanised steel
• SlimLED PANEL (panel light), incl. mounting carrier plate and cable • Transformer / power supply unit, incl. cable • Fastening material
Mounting support plate Light source / panel light Number of LEDs 120 pieces 240 pieces Energy efficiency class A Colour temperature 4 000° K ± 250 K Luminous flux 1550 lm 3200 lm Colour rendering index >80% (CRI) Power consumption 24 W 46 W Protection class IP20 Transformer / power supply unit (external) Dimensions 103 x 67 x 21 mm Input voltage 110 - 240 VAC Output voltage 12 VDC www.liftequip.com
M3
Scope of supply
High energy efficiency class
219
Safety
Calendar
September 2017
ad: o l n w o
D
CW 35
rg aisbl.o
4 37 11 38 18 39 25
5 12 19 26
36
la-
www.e
MON TUE WED THU
6 13 20 27
7 14 21 28
October 2017
FRI
SAT SUN
1 8 15 22 29
2 9 16 23 30
3 10 17 24
CW
MON TUE WED THU
40 41 42 43
2 9 16 23 30
January 2018
BASIC SAFETY PRACTICES FOR LIFTS
MON TUE WED THU
1 8 3 15 4 22 5 29
2 9 16 23 30
1 2
3 10 17 24 31
4 11 18 25
SAT SUN
6 13 20 27
1 8 15 22 29
39
44
CW
November 2017
FRI
3 10 17 24 31
4 11 18 25
5 12 19 26
7 14 21 28
CW
MON TUE WED THU
44
6 46 13 47 20 48 27 45
February 2018
FRI
SAT SUN
5 12 19 26
6 13 20 27
CW
7 14 21 28
MON TUE WED THU
5
5 7 12 8 19 9 26 6
6 13 20 27
FRI
7 14 21 28
1 8 15 22 29
2 9 16 23 30
December 2017
FRI
SAT SUN
3 10 17 24
4 11 18 25
5 12 19 26
CW 48
4 50 11 51 18 52 25 49
May 2018 MON TUE WED THU
1 2 3 7 8 9 10 14 15 16 17 21 22 23 24 28
4 11 18 25
CW
FRI
SAT SUN
1 8 15 22 29
2 9 16 23 30
3 10 17 24 31
9
5 11 12 12 19 13 26 10
6 13 20 27
7 14 21 28
1 8 15 22 29
18
7 20 14 21 21 22 28 19
2 9 16 23 30
3 10 17 24 31
SAT SUN
4 11 18 25
5 12 19 26
6 13 20 27
CW
MON TUE WED THU
4 11 18 25
CW
22
4 24 11 25 18 26 25 23
5 12 19 26
6 13 20 27
7 14 21 28
SAT SUN
1 8 15 22 29
2 9 16 23 30
3 10 17 24
CW 27 28 29 30
September 2018 MON TUE WED THU
FRI
35 36
3
4
5
6
7
37 10 11 12 13 14 38 17 18 19 20 21 39 24 25 26 27 28
2 9 16 23 30
October 2018 SAT SUN
1 8 15 22 29
2 9 16 23 30
CW 40 41 42 43 44
MON TUE WED THU
1 8 15 22 29
2 9 16 23 30
3 10 17 24 31
4 11 18 25
3 10 17 24 31
4 11 18 25
5 12 19 26
SAT SUN
5 12 19 26
6 13 20 27
7 14 21 28
CW
14 15 16
6 13 20 27
1 8 15 22 29
7 14 21 28
CW
European Lift Association; 44 Avenue Herrmann-Debroux, box 1, B-1160 Brussels Tel.: +32 (0) 2 779 50 82 Fax.: +32 (0) 2 772 16 85
220
Holiday Neujahrstag
Federal state Nationwide
6. Jan. 2018
Heilige Drei Könige
Baden-Württemberg, Bayern, Sachsen-Anhalt
30. März 2018 01.04.2018 02.04.2018 01.05.2018 10.05.2018 20.05.2018 21.05.2018
Karfreitag Ostersonntag Ostermontag Tag der Arbeit Christi Himmelfahrt Pfingstsonntag Pfingstmontag
31.05.2018
Fronleichnam
15.08.2018
Mariä Himmelfahrt
03.10.2018
Tag der Deutschen Einheit
Nationwide
31.10.2018
Reformationstag
Brandenburg, Mecklenburg-Vorpommern, Sachsen, Sachsen-Anhalt, Thüringen
01.11.2018
Allerheiligen
21.11.2018 25.12.2018 26.12.2018
Buß- und Bettag 1. Weihnachtstag 2. Weihnachtstag
Nationwide Brandenburg Nationwide Nationwide Nationwide Brandenburg Nationwide Baden-Württemberg, Bayern, Hessen, Nordrhein-Westfalen, Rheinland-Pfalz, Saarland Bayern (kathol. Gebiete), Saarland
Baden-Württemberg, Bayern, NordrheinWestfalen, Rheinland-Pfalz, Saarland Sachsen Nationwide Nationwide
2 9 16 23 30
6 13 20 27
7 14 21 28
45
SAT SUN
1 8 15 22 29
2 9 16 23 30
3 10 17 24
5
6
7
47 19 20 21 48 26 27 28
School holidays Germany 2018 Christmas Winter School year BW 22.12.-5.1. BY BE BB HB HH HE MV NI NRW RP SL SN ST SH TH
4 11 18 25
5 12 19 26
1 8 15 22 29
MON TUE WED THU
6 33 13 34 20 35 27 32
7 14 21 28
1 8 15 22 29
2 9 16 23 30
FRI
SAT SUN
3 10 17 24 31
4 11 18 25
5 12 19 26
December 2018
FRI
46 12 13 14
3 10 17 24
31
4 11 18 25
CW
Easter 2017/18 26.3.-6.4.
MON TUE WED THU
FRI
48 49
3
4
5
6
7
50 10 11 12 13 14 51 17 18 19 20 21 52 24 25 26 27 28 1
Holiday 2018 Date 01.01.2018
SAT SUN
August 2018 SAT SUN
MON TUE WED THU
44
3 10 17 24 31
FRI
November 2018
FRI
2 9 16 23 30
13
17
FRI
26
31
CW
MON TUE WED THU
7 14 21 28
SAT SUN
1 8 15 22 29
MON TUE WED THU
July 2018
FRI
6 13 20 27
FRI
April 2018
MON TUE WED THU
June 2018
FRI
5 12 19 26
March 2018 SAT SUN
18
CW
MON TUE WED THU
Calendar
Basic safety practices for lifts
With us you can plan
Pentecost
SAT SUN
1 8 15 22 29
2 9 16 23 30
31
Summer
Autumn Christmas 2018/19 22.5.-2.6. 26.7.-8.9. 29.10.-2.11. 24.12.-5.1. 29.10.-2.11. / 23.12.-5.1. 12.2.-16.2. 26.3.-7.4. 22.5.-2.6. 30.7.-10.9. 22.12.-5.1. 21.11. 21.12.-2.1. 5.2.-10.2. 26.3.-6.4. 30.4./11., 22.5. 5.7.-17.8. 22.10.-2.11. 22.12.-5.1. 21.12.-2.1. 5.2.-10.2. 26.3.-6.4. 30.4./11.5. 5.7.-18.8. 22.10.-2.11. 21.12.-5.1. 22.12.-6.1. 1./2.2. 19.3.-3.4. 30.4./11., 22.5. 28.6.-8.8. 1.10.-13.10. 24.12.-4.1. 22.12.-5.1. 2.2. 5.3.-16.3. 30.4./7.-11.5. 5.7.-15.8. 1.10.-12.10. 20.12.-4.1. 24.12.-13.1. 26.3.-7.4. 25.6.-3.8. 1.10.-13.10. 24.12.-12.1. 8.-13.10. / 21.12.-3.1. 5.2.-16.2. 26.3.-4.4. 11./18.-22.5. 9.7.-18.8. 24.12.-5.1. 1.-2.11. 22.12.-5.1. 1./2.2. 19.3.-3.4. 30.4./11., 22.5. 28.6.-8.8. 1.10.-12.10. 24.12.-4.1. 27.12.-6.1. 26.3.-7.4. 22.5.-25.5. 16.7.-28.8. 15.10.-27.10. 21.12.-4.1. 22.12.-9.1. 26.3.-6.4. 25.6.-3.8. 1.10.-12.10. 20.12.-4.1. 21.12.-5.1. 12.2.-17.2. 26.3.-6.4. 25.6.-3.8. 1.10.-12.10. 20.12.-4.1. 23.12.-2.1. 12.2.-23.2. 29.3.-6.4. 11./19.-22.5. 2.7.-10.8. 8.10.-20.10. 22.12.-4.1. 21.12.-3.1. 5.2.-9.2. 26.3.-31.3. 30.4./11.-19.5. 28.6.-8.8. 1.10.-12.10. 19.12.-4.1. 21.12.-6.1. 29.3.-13.4. 11.5. 9.7.-18.8. 1.10.-19.10. 21.12.-4.1. 22.12.-5.1. 5.2.-9.2. 26.3.-7.4. 11.5. 2.7.-11.8. 1.10.-13.10. 21.12.-4.1.
All information without guarantee
Issue 09/2017
www.liftequip.com
221
LiftEquip TEAM
LiftEquip TEAM
Managing Director
Support
E-Mail:
[email protected]
Thorsten Elsässer
Nida Koyuncu
Melanie Menzler
Matthias Bayha
Jochen Digel
Managing Director
Order Management
Order Management
Head of Order Management
Hotline Frequency Inverter
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2928 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 752 3037 thorsten.elsaesser@ liftequip.de
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2963 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 218 2946
[email protected]
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2894 melanie.menzler@ liftequip.de
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2962 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 745 6004 matthias.bayha@ liftequip.de
M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 2020
E-Mail:
[email protected]
Sales D-A-CH
Sales Export
222
Order management
We're here for you
E-Mail:
[email protected]
Volker Lenzner
Norbert Blum
Anita Rank
Frank Jobst
Head of Product Service
Product Service
Sales Support
Quality Management
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2967 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 1166
[email protected]
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2473 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 709 1440
[email protected]
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2294 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 4988
[email protected]
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2940 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 4987
[email protected]
E-Mail:
[email protected]
Sales D-A-CH
E-Mail:
[email protected]
Thorsten Woitanowski Senior Technical Manager T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2893 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 895 5140 thorsten.woitanowski@ liftequip.de
Thomas Bäzner
Jochen Böhmler
Volker Hermenau
Christopher Clark
Head of Sales D-A-CH
Sales D-A-CH
Sales D-A-CH
Sales D-A-CH
Trainee
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2935 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 709 1426 markus.bruckmeyer@ liftequip.de
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2986 M: +49 (0) 172 / 735 0058 thomas.baezner@ liftequip.de
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2987 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 2040 jochen.boehmler@ liftequip.de
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2975 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 4090 volker.hermenau@ liftequip.de
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2970 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 200 7742 christopher.clark@ liftequip.de
Sales Export
Scheduling
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2071 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 709 1436 thomas.oelschlaegel@ liftequip.de
E-Mail:
[email protected]
Günter Stoll
Ewelina Czarnik
Maria Kairidou
Patrick Schoch
Julian Wirtl
Head of Sales Export
Sales Export
Sales Export
Sales Export
Sales Export
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2969 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 1839
[email protected]
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2968 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 1699 ewelina.czarnik@ liftequip.de
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2027 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 4100 maria.kairidou@ liftequip.de
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2966 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 3838 patrick.schoch@ liftequip.de
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2964 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 675 4018
[email protected]
Issue 09/2017
Thomas Oelschlägel
E-Mail:
[email protected]
Markus Bruckmeyer
E-Mail:
[email protected]
LiftEquip TEAM
LiftEquip TEAM
The TEAM of LiftEquip
www.liftequip.com
223
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components Bernhaeuser Straße 45 D-73765 Neuhausen a.d.F. Tel.: +49 (0) 71 58 12 - 2929 Fax: +49 (0) 71 58 12 - 2971 E-Mail:
[email protected] Internet: www.liftequip.com
More than you expect ...